n 
 
 I 
 
University of California Berkeley 
 
 THE THEODORE P. HILL COLLECTION 
 
 of 
 EARLY AMERICAN MATHEMATICS BOOKS 
 
PRACTICAL TREATISE 
 
 ON THE 
 
 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL 
 
 CALCULUS, 
 
 WITH SOME OF ITS 
 
 APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND 
 ASTRONOMY. 
 
 BY 
 
 WILLIAM G. PECK, PH.D., LL.D., 
 
 Profeswr of Mathematics and Astronomy in Columbia. Colleen 
 and of Mechanics in tht School of Mines. 
 
 A. S. BARNES & COMPANY, 
 NEW YORK AND CHICAGO. 
 
PUBLISHERS' NOTICE. 
 
 PECK'S MATHEMATICAL SERIES. 
 
 CONCISE, CONSECUTIVE, AND COMPLETE. 
 
 I. FIRST LESSONS IN NUMBERS. 
 II. MANUAL OF PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC. 
 
 III. COMPLETE ARITHMETIC. 
 
 IV. MANUAL OF ALGEBRA. 
 V. MANUAL OF GEOMETRY. 
 
 VI. TREATISE ON ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY. 
 VII. DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 VIII. ELEMENTARY MECHANICS (without the Calculus). 
 XL ELEMENTS OF MECHANICS (with the Calculus). 
 
 NOTE. Teachers and others, discovering errors in any of 
 the above works, will confer a favor by communicating them 
 to us. 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1870, by 
 
 WILLIAM G. PECK, 
 In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 THE following pages are designed to embody the course 
 of " Calculus and its Applications," as now taught in 
 Columbia College. This course being purely optional, is 
 selected by those only who have a taste for mathematical 
 studies, and it is pursued by them more with reference to 
 its utility than as a means of mental discipline. These 
 circumstances have given to the present work a practical 
 character that can hardly fail to commend it to those who 
 study the Calculus for the advantages it gives them in 
 the solution of scientific problems. To meet the wants 
 of this class of students, great care has been taken to avoid 
 superfluous matter; the definitions have been revised and 
 abbreviated; the demonstrations have been simplified and 
 condensed ; the rules and principles have been illustrated 
 and enforced by numerous examples, so chosen as to famil- 
 iarize the student with the use of radical and transcen- 
 dental quantities; and finally, the manner of applying the 
 Calculus has been exemplified by the solution of a variety 
 of problems in Mechanics and Astronomy. 
 
 The method employed in developing the principles of 
 the science is essentially that of Leibnitz. This method, 
 
4: PKEFACE. 
 
 generally known as the method of infinitesimals, has been 
 adopted for several reasons: first, it is the method adopted 
 in all practical investigations; second, it is the method 
 most easily explained and most readily comprehended ; 
 and third, it is a method, as will be shown in the final 
 note, identical in results with the more commonly adopted 
 method of limits, differing from it chiefly in its phraseology 
 and in the simplicity of its results. 
 
 The author cannot conclude this prefatory note with- 
 out acknowledging his obligations to those students who, 
 from year to year, have been willing to turn aside from 
 the attractive pursuit of classical learning to engage in the 
 sterner study of those processes that have contributed so 
 much to the progress of modern science. Without their 
 interest and co-operation this book would never have been 
 written. He would also take this opportunity to express 
 his thanks to his distinguished colleague, Professor J. H. 
 VAN AMRISTGE, not only for many valuable suggestions 
 made during the progress of the work, but also for much 
 effective labor in reading and correcting the proofs as they 
 came from the press. 
 
 COLUMBIA COLLEGE, 
 
 Nwember 24&, 1870. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PART 1.-DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 I. DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 
 Art. 
 
 1. Classification of Quantities 9 
 
 2. Functions of one or more Variables 9 
 
 3. Geometrical Representation of a Function 10 
 
 4. Differentials and Differentiation 10 
 
 5. Geometrical Illustration 13 
 
 6. Infinites and Infinitesimals 13 
 
 7. General Method of Differentiation 14 
 
 II. DIFFERENTIATION OF ALGEBRAIC FUNCTIONS. 
 
 8. Definition of an Algebraic Function 15 
 
 9. Differential of a Polynomial 15 
 
 10. Differential of a Product 16 
 
 11. Differential of a Fraction 17 
 
 12. Differential of a Power 18 
 
 13. Differential of a Radical 18 
 
 III. DIFFERENTIATION OF TRANSCENDENTAL FUNCTIONS. 
 
 14. Definition of a Transcendental Function 24 
 
 15. Differential of a Logarithm 25 
 
 16. Differential of an Exponential Function 26 
 
 17. Differentials of Circular Functions 29 
 
 18. Differentials of Inverse Circular Functions 32 
 
 IV. SUCCESSIVE DIFFERENTIATION AND DEVELOPMENT OF 
 FUNCTIONS. 
 
 1 9. Successive Differentials 35 
 
 20. Successive Differential Coefficients 35 
 
 21. McLaurin's Formula 37 
 
 M. Taylor's Formula 41 
 
CONTEXTS. 
 
 V. DIFFERENTIATION OF FUNCTIONS OF TWO VARIABLES AND OF 
 IMPLICIT FUNCTIONS. 
 
 Art. PACK 
 
 23. Geometrical Representation of a Function of two Variables. 45 
 
 24. Differential of a Function of two Variables 4G 
 
 25. Notation for Partial Differentials 47 
 
 26. Successive Differentiation of Functions of two Variables ... 48 
 
 27. Extension to three or more Variables 50 
 
 28. Definition of Explicit and Implicit Functions 50 
 
 29. Differentials of Implicit Functions 50 
 
 PART II APPLICATIONS OF THE DIFFERENTIAL 
 CALCULUS. 
 
 I. TANGENTS AND ASYMPTOTES. 
 
 30. Geometrical Representation of first Differential Coefficient. . 53 
 
 31 . Applications 54 
 
 32. Equations of the Tangent and Normal 55 
 
 33. Asymptotes 57 
 
 34. Order of Contact 59 
 
 II. CURVATURE. 
 
 35. Direction of Curvature GO 
 
 36. Amount of Curvature 62 
 
 d7. Osculatory Circle 63 
 
 38. Radius of Curvature 64 
 
 39. Co-ordinates of Centre of Curvature 65 
 
 40. Locus of the Centre of Curvature 66 
 
 41. Equation of the Evolute of a Curve 67 
 
 III. SINGULAR POINTS OF CURVES. 
 
 42. Definition of a Singular Point 08 
 
 43. Points of Inflexion 68 
 
 44. Cusps 70 
 
 45. Multiple Points 71 
 
 46. Conjugate Points 73 
 
 IV. MAXIMA AND MINIMA. 
 
 47. Definitions of Maximum and Minimum 74 
 
 48. Analytical Characteristics 75 
 
 49. Maxima and Minima of a Function of two Variables 86 
 
CONTENTS. 7 
 
 V. SINGULAR VALUES OP FUNCTIONS. 
 
 Art. PAOR 
 
 50. Definition and Method of Evaluation 88 
 
 VI. ELEMENTS OF GEOMETRICAL MAGNITUDES. 
 
 61. Differentials of Lines, Surfaces, and Volumes 91 
 
 VII. APPLICATION TO POLAR CO-ORDINATES. 
 
 52. General Notions, and Definitions 93 
 
 53. Useful Formulas 94 
 
 54. Spirals 97 
 
 55. Spiral of Archimedes 98 
 
 VIII. TRANSCENDENTAL CURVES. 
 
 56. Definition 99 
 
 57. TheCycloid 99 
 
 58. The Logarithmic Curve 101 
 
 PART III. INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 59. Object of the Integral Calculus 102 
 
 60. Nature of an Integral 1 02 
 
 61. Methods of Integration ; Simplifications 104 
 
 62. Fundamental Formulas 104 
 
 63. Integration by Parts 114 
 
 04. Additional Formulas ' . 115 
 
 65. Rational and Entire Differentials 120 
 
 06. Rational Fractions 121 
 
 67. Integration by Substitution, and Rationalization 128 
 
 68. When the only Irrational Parts are Monomial 128 
 
 69. Binomial Differentials 130 
 
 70. Integration by Successive Reduction 133 
 
 71. Certain Trinomial Differentials 141 
 
 72. Integration by Series 144 
 
 73. Integration of Transcendental Differentials. 145 
 
 74. Logarithmic Differentials 145 
 
 75. Exponential Differentials 147 
 
 70. Circular Differentials 148 
 
 77. Integration of Differential Functions of two Variables 153 
 
 PART IV. APPLICATIONS OF THE INTEGRAL CAL- 
 CULUS. 
 I. LENGTHS OF PLANE CURVES. 
 
 78. Rectification. . 156 
 
CONTENTS. 
 II. AREAS OP PLANE CURVES. 
 
 A rt ' PAOl 
 
 79. Quadrature 101 
 
 III. AREAS OF SURFACES OF REVOLUTION. 
 
 80. Surfaces Generated by the Revolution of Plane Curves 105 
 
 IV. VOLUMES OF SOLIDS OF REVOLUTION. 
 
 81. Cubature 1G7 
 
 PART V. APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND 
 ASTRONOMY. 
 
 I. CENTRE OF GRAVITY. 
 
 82. Principles Employed 171 
 
 83. Centre of Gravity of a Circular Arc 173 
 
 84. Centre of Gravity of a Parabolic Area 174 
 
 85. Centre of Gravity of a Semi-Ellipsoid of Revolution 175 
 
 86. Centre of Gravity of a Cone 176 
 
 87. Centre of Gravity of a Paraboloid of Revolution 176 
 
 II. MOMENT OF INERTIA. 
 
 88. Definitions and Preliminary Principles 176 
 
 89. Moment of Inertia of a Straight Line 177 
 
 90. Moment of Inertia of a Circle 178 
 
 01. Moment of Inertia of a Cylinder 179 
 
 92. Moment of Inertia of a Sphere 180 
 
 III. MOTION OF A MATERIAL POINT. 
 
 93. General Formulas 181 
 
 94. Uniformly Varied Motion 182 
 
 95. Bodies Falling under influence of Constant Force 183 
 
 96. Bodies Falling under action of Variable Force 186 
 
 97. Vibration of a Particle of an Elastic Medium 188 
 
 98. Curvilinear Motion of a Point 190 
 
 99. Velocity of a Point rolling down a Curve 192 
 
 100. The Simple Pendulum 193 
 
 101. Attraction of Homogeneous Spheres 195 
 
 102. Oibital Motion 199 
 
 103. Law of Force 204 
 
 104. Note on the Methods of the Calculus 205 
 
PART I. 
 
 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 I. DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTORY REMARKS, 
 
 Classification of Quantities. 
 
 I. THE quantities considered in Calculus are of two 
 kinds: constants, which retain a fixed value throughout 
 the same discussion, and variables, which admit of all pos- 
 sible values that will satisfy the equations into which they 
 enter. The former are usually denoted by leading letters 
 of the alphabet, as a, I, c, etc.; and the latter by final 
 letters, as x, y, z, etc. ; particular values of variable quan- 
 tities are denoted by writing them with one or more dashes, 
 as x', y", z'", etc. 
 
 Functions of one or more Variables. 
 
 2. Relations between variables are expressed by equa- 
 tions. In an equation between two variables, values may 
 be assigned to one at pleasure; the resulting equation de- 
 termines the corresponding values of the other. The one 
 to which arbitrary values are assigned is called the inde- 
 pendent variable, and the remaining one is said to be a 
 function of the former. If an equation contain more than 
 two variables, all but one are independent, and that one is 
 a function of all the others. The fact that a quantity 
 
10 DIFFEEENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 depends on one or more variables may be expressed as 
 follows : 
 
 y =f(z) ; z - <p(x, y) ; F(x, y, z) = 0. 
 
 The first shows that y is a function of x, the second that 
 z is a function of x and y, and the third that x, y, and z, 
 depend on each other, without pointing out which is u 
 function of the other two. 
 
 Geometrical representation of a Function. 
 
 3. Every function of one variable may be represented b} 
 the ordinate of a curve, of which the variable is the cor- 
 responding abscissa. For, let y be a function of x, and 
 suppose x to increase by insensible gradations from oo 
 to + oo . For each value of x there will be one or more 
 values of y, and these, if real, will determine the position 
 of a point with respect to two rectangular axes. These 
 points make up a curve, at every point of which the rela- 
 tion between the ordinate and abscissa is the same as that 
 between the function and independent variable. This 
 curve is called the curve of the function. 
 
 For values of x that give imaginary values of y there are 
 no points; for those that give more than one real value of 
 y there is a corresponding number of points. 
 
 In a similar manner -it may be shown that a function 
 of two variables represents the ordinate of a surface of 
 which the variables are corresponding abscissas. 
 
 Differentials and Differentiation. 
 
 4. Of two quantities, that is the less whose value is 
 nearer to oo, and that is the greater whose value is 
 nearer to + oo. A quantity is said to increase when it 
 
DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 11 
 
 approaches + GO, and to decrease when it approaches oo. 
 The ordi nates of a curve originate from the axis of X and 
 of any two, that is the greater whose extremity is nearer 
 4- oo, and that is the less whose extremity is nearer co; 
 in like manner of two abscissas, that is the greater whose 
 extremity is nearer -f- oo , and that the less whose extremity 
 is nearer oo . 
 
 In w r hat follows we shall suppose the independent varia- 
 ble to increase by the continued addition of a constant but 
 infinitely small increment. For every change in the value 
 of the variable there is a corresponding change in the value 
 of the function. In some cases, as the variable increases, 
 the function increases ; it is then said to be an increasing 
 function : in other cases the function decreases as the 
 variable increases ; it is then said to be a decreasing func- 
 tion. In all cases, the change in value is called an incre- 
 ment ; for increasing functions the increment is positive, 
 and for decreasing functions it is negative. The increment 
 of the function is always infinitely small, but it is not con- 
 stant, except in particular cases. 
 
 The infinitely small increment of the independent varia- 
 ble is called the differential of the variable, and the cor- 
 responding increment of the function is called the differ- 
 ential of the function. Hence, the differential of a quantity 
 is the difference between two consecutive values of that 
 quantify. It is to be observed that the difference is always 
 found by taking the first value from the second. 
 
 The operation of finding a differential is called differen- 
 tiation. The object of the differential calculus is to ex- 
 plain the methods of differentiating functions. 
 
DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Geometrical Illustratiou. 
 
 5. Let KL be a curve in the plane of the rectangular 
 axes OX and OY 9 and let OA and OB be two abscissas 
 differing from each other by an infi- 
 nitely small quantity A B. Through 
 A and B draw ordinates to the 
 curve, and let PR be parallel to 
 OX. OA and OB are consecutive 
 abscissas, AP and BQ are consecu- 
 tive ordinates, and P and Q are 
 consecutive points of the curve. 
 The part of the curve PQ does 
 not differ sensibly from a straight line, and if it be pro 
 longed toward T, the line PT is tangent to the curve at 
 P. If we denote any abscissa OA by x, and the corre- 
 sponding ordinate by y, we have, 
 
 Fig. ]. 
 
 The line AB is the differential of the independent varia- 
 ble, denoted by the symbol dx; RQ is the differential of 
 the function, denoted by dy\ and PQ is the differential 
 of the curve KL, denoted by ds. 
 
 The right angled triangle, RPQ, gives the relation 
 ds = Vdx* + dy\ Denoting the angle RPQ by 6, we 
 have, from trigonometry, 
 
 dy 
 
 ~ ; 
 dx 
 
 _dy_ 
 ~ ds~ 
 
 dy 
 
 dx 
 
 and, cosd =-=- = 
 cfe 
 
 dx 
 
 -f- dy* 
 
DEFINITIONS AND INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. 13 
 
 Infinites and Infinitesimals. 
 
 6. A quantity is infinitely great with respect to another, 
 when the quotient of the former by the latter is greater 
 than any assignable number, and infinitely small with re- 
 spect to it, when the quotient is less than any assignable, 
 number. If the term of comparison infinite, quantities of 
 the former class are called infinites, and those of the latter 
 infinitesimals. 
 
 Infinites and infinitesimals are of different orders. Let 
 us assume the series, 
 
 a a a 
 
 ' ' ?' a 5 ' "? a ' aX) ' ' 
 
 In which a is a finite constant and x variable. If we 
 suppose x to increase, the terms preceding a will diminish, 
 and those following it will increase ; when x becomes greater 
 
 than any assignable quantity, becomes infinitely small 
 
 30 
 
 with respect to a, and because each term bears the same 
 relation to the one that follows it, every term in the series 
 is infinitely small with respect to the following one, and 
 infinitely great with respect to the preceding one. The 
 quantity ax being infinitely great with respect to a finite 
 quantity, is called an infinite of i\\.Q first order; ax*, ax*, 
 etc., are infinites of the second, third, etc., orders. The 
 
 quantity - being infinitely small with respect to a finite 
 x 
 
 quantity is called an infinitesimal of the first order; -^ -3, 
 
 x x 
 
 etc, are infinitesimals of the second, third, etc., orders. 
 
 It is to be observed that the product of two infinitesi- 
 mals of the first order, is an infinitesimal of the second 
 
1* D1FFEKEXT1AJ. CALCULUS. 
 
 order. For, let x and y be infinitely small with respect 
 to 1, we shall have, 
 
 1 : x : : y : xy. 
 
 Hence, xy bears the same relation to y that x does to 1, 
 that is, it is infinitely small with respect to an infinitesimal 
 of the first order; it is therefore an infinitesimal of the 
 second order. The product of three infinitesimals of the 
 first order is an infinitesimal of the third order, and so on. 
 In general, the product of an infinitesimal of the ?/? th order 
 by one of the n th order, is an infinitesimal of the (m + n) tb 
 order. The product of a finite quantity by an infinitesimal 
 of the w th order, is an infinitesimal of the w th order. 
 
 From the nature of an infinite quantity, its value will 
 not be sensibly changed by the addition or subtraction of 
 a finite quantity. A finite quantity may therefore be dis- 
 regarded in comparison with an infinite quantity. For 
 a like reason an infinitesimal may be disregarded in com- 
 parison with a finite quantity, or with an infinitesimal of a 
 lower order. Hence, whenever an infinitesimal is con- 
 nected, by the sign of addition, or subtraction, with a finite 
 quantity, or with an infinitesimal of a lower order, it may 
 be suppressed without affecting the value of the expression 
 into which it enters. 
 
 General method of Differentiation. 
 
 7. In order to find the differential of a function, we give 
 to the independent variable its infinitely small increment, 
 and find the corresponding value of the function; from 
 this we subtract the preceding value and reduce the result 
 to its simplest form; we then suppress all infinitesimals 
 which are added to, or subtracted from, those of a lowei 
 order, and the result is the differential required. 
 
DIFFERENTIATION OF ALGEBRAIC FUNCTIONS. 15 
 
 This method of proceeding is too long for general use, 
 and is only employed in deducing rules for differentiation. 
 
 II. DIFFERENTIATION OF ALGEBRAIC FUNCTIONS. 
 
 Definition of an Algebraic Function. ' 
 
 8. An algebraic function is one in which the relation 
 between the function and its variable can be expressed by 
 the ordinary operations of algebra, that is, addition, sub- 
 traction, multiplication, division, formation of powers de- 
 noted by constant exponents, and extraction of roots indicated 
 by constant indices. Thus, 
 
 y* = 2px, y = ax 3 ^/bx, and ^/y = *^a*x bx* % 
 are algebraic functions. 
 
 Differential of a Polynomial. 
 
 9. Let a and c be constants, and r, s, t, functions of x\ 
 assume 
 
 y = ar + s t + c\ (1) 
 
 in which y denotes the polynomial in the second member, 
 and is therefore a function of x. 
 
 If we give to x the increment dx, the functions y, r, s* 
 and t, receive corresponding increments dy, dr, ds, dt, and 
 we have, 
 
 y + dy = a(r + dr) + (s 4- ds) - (t + dt) + c (2) 
 
 subtracting (1) from (2), we have, 
 
 dy = adr + ds dt (3) 
 
 Hence, to differentiate a polynomial, differentiate each 
 term separately and take the algebraic sum of the results. 
 
 Comparing (1) and (3) we see, first, that a constant factor 
 remains unchanged, and secondly, that a constant term 
 disappears by differentiation. 
 
16 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Differential of a Product. 
 
 10. Let r and s be functions of x. Placing their pro- 
 duct equal to y, we have, 
 
 y = rs (1) 
 
 Giving to x the increment dx, we have, as before, 
 y 4- dy = (r -f dr) (s 4- ds) = rs + rds + sdr + drds. . (2) 
 Subtracting (1) from (2) and suppressing ^TY?S, which is an 
 infinitesimal of tbe second order, we have, after replacing 
 y by its value rs, 
 
 d(rs) = rds + sdr (3) 
 
 Hence, to differentiate the product of two functions, 
 multiply each by the differential of the other, and take the 
 algebraic sum of the results. 
 
 If we suppose r = tw, we have, from the rule, 
 
 dr = tdw + wdt ; 
 which substituted in (3), gives, 
 
 d(stiu) = twds + stdiv + swdt (4) 
 
 In like manner the principle may be extended to the 
 product of any number of functions. Hence, to differen- 
 tiate the product of any number of functions, multiply the 
 differential of each ~by the continued product of all the 
 others, and take the algebraic sum of the results. 
 
 COR. If we divide both members of (4) bystw, we have, 
 d(sfw) _ ds dt dw .. 
 
 1 fJ I 
 
 stw s t w 
 
 and similarly, where there are a greater number of factors. 
 Hence, the differential of a product divided ly that pro- 
 duct, is equal to the sum of the quotients obtained ly 
 dividing the differential of each factor by that factor. 
 
DIFFERENTIATION OF ALGEBRAIC FUNCTIONS. 17 
 
 Differential of a Fraction. 
 11. Let 6 1 and t be functions of x, and assume, 
 
 Giving to x the increment dx, we have, 
 
 Subtracting (1) from (2), 
 
 + ds s ids sdt 
 
 dy = 
 
 t + dt t f + tdt ' 
 
 s 
 
 Replacing y by its value -, and suppressing tdt in compari- 
 son with f , we have, 
 
 ids - sdt 
 = jr .(8) 
 
 Hence, the differential of a fraction is equal to the denom- 
 inator into the differential of the numerator, minus the 
 numerator into the differential of the denominator, divided 
 by the square of the denominator. 
 
 If either term of the fraction be constant, its differential 
 will be, 0. When the denominator is constant, formula (3) 
 becomes, 
 
 '6) = 7' 
 
 ... (4) 
 when the numerator is constant it becomes, 
 
18 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Differential of a Power. 
 12. Let s be a function of x, and m a constant. Assume 
 
 y = * m ..... (i) 
 
 Giving to x the increment clx, we have, 
 
 y + dy = (s + ds) m = s m + ms m " l ds 
 (etc.) ..... (2) 
 
 In which all the terms of the development, after the second, 
 contain the square, or some higher power, of ds. Subtract- 
 ing (1) from (2), we have, 
 
 dy = ms m ~^ds + (etc.) ds 2 . 
 
 Suppressing all the terms of the second member, after the 
 first, in accordance with the principle laid down in Art. 6, 
 and replacing y by its value, we have, 
 
 d(s m ) = ms m ~^ds ..... (3) 
 
 Hence, to differentiate any power of a function, diminish 
 the exponent oj 'the function by 1, and multiply the result by 
 the primitive exponent and the differential of the function. 
 
 Differential cf a Radical. 
 13. Let s be a function of x, and assume, 
 
 y = ft ..... (i) 
 

 
 DIFFERENTIATION" OF ALGEBRAIC FUNCTIONS. 19 
 
 We may write (1) in the form, 
 1 
 
 Differentiating (2), as in the last article, we have, 
 
 1-1 1-rc 
 
 dy = -s n ds = -s n ds ..... (3) 
 
 J n n 
 
 Replacing y by its value, and remembering that 
 s \n W e have. 
 
 . 
 
 (4) 
 
 That is, the differential of a radical of the ^ th degree 
 5.3 equal to the differential of the quantity under the 
 radical sign, divided by n times the (n l) th poiver of the 
 radical (ifcz *ra, 
 
 uuj -nC 
 , 
 
 ^~s = f- ..... (5) 
 
 oT? " ^ 1& 
 
 That is, the differential of the square root of a quantity 
 is equal to the differential of the quantity under the radical 
 sign, divided by twice the radical. & b*-^ 
 
 The preceding rules are sufficient to differentiate any 
 algebraic function whatever. 
 
20 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 1. Let y = 5z 3 . 
 
 This is the product of the function cc 3 by the constant 5 ; 
 hence, (Art. 9), 
 
 dy = 5d(x*) = 5X 3x*dx = 15x*dx (Art. 12). 
 
 2. Let y = x 3 + 2x 2 + 3x + 4. 
 
 This is a polynomial. Hence, from Art. 9, 
 dy = 3x 2 dx + ^xdx + MX. 
 
 3. Lety = ( + J) s . 
 
 Considering a + Jo; as a single quantity, we have, 
 (Art. 12), 
 
 dy = 3(+ te) 8 d(a + lx) = 3(a + lx)*bdx = 3b(a + bx)*dx. 
 
 4. Let y = (a + lx*) n . 
 dy = n(a 
 
 5. Let y = A/ 2 - 2 = (a 2 - z 2 ) 2 . 
 
 dy = J(a 2 - z 2 )"^ x - Zxdx = - 
 
 6. Let y = (a + x)(b + 2a?). 
 By Art. 10, we have, 
 
 dy= (a + x)d(b + 2x 2 ) + (b + 2x 2 )d(a -\- 
 i- (b + 2x*)dx ; or, fy 
 B + b)dx. 
 
DIFFERENTIATION OF ALGEBRAIC FUNCTIONS. 21 
 
 
 
 By Art. 11, we have, 
 
 x 2 )d(ax) axd(a* + a 2 ) __ a(a 2 -x 2 ) 
 
 ~~ 
 
 , 
 
 8. Let y=^ x + 
 dy = d[x + (a 2 
 
 X 
 W,t, d\x + (a* 
 
 10. y=a to <i 
 
 Am. dy = - 
 
 11. y = (a 2 - x*)*. Ans. dy = - x(a* - z*)dx. 
 
 12. y = (%ax x 2 ) 3 . Ans. dy = 6(a - x)(2ax x*)'dx, 
 
DIFFERENTIAL CALCLLUS. 
 
 13. y = (a+bx n ). Ans.dy = mn1)x n - l ( 
 
 14. y=(2ax + x*) n . Ans.dy=2n(a + x)(2ax 
 
 15. y = x(a + x)(a z 
 
 Ans. dy = (a 3 -f 2a*x + Sax 2 + x*)dx. 
 
 16. y = (a + x) m (b + x} n . 
 
 17. v = 
 
 a x 
 a + x' 
 
 18. y = 
 
 x + 3 
 -x + l 
 
 19. y = fi 
 
 20. y = 
 
 21. y = 
 
 22. y = 
 
 23. y = (a a;) 
 
 24. y= (a + x)Va 
 
 +OX 
 
 Ans. dv = 
 
 (x + 2)(x 
 
 ( 
 
 . dy = 7- 
 
 - 
 
 - 2 
 
 Ans. dy = 
 
 Ans. dy = xdx - 
 
 ' 
 
 (2rcg + b)dx 
 
 ~ 2V ax 2 + bx + o ; 
 
 ( + 3:?;)^ 
 
 -4ft*. tfy = - ; . 
 %Va + x 
 
 (a - 3x)dx 
 
 Ans. dy = ; - 
 
 2Va - x 
 
DIFFERENTIATION OF ALGEBRAIC FUNCTIONS. 23 
 
 
 
 * - 3)dx 
 
 . , 
 
 25. y \l x* -{- X s )*. Ans. dy = - 
 
 26. y (a 2 x 2 )Va + x. 
 
 Ans. dy 
 
 
 87. y = -/= 
 va 
 
 23. = 
 
 . dy = 
 
 (3a - 
 
 adx 
 
 20. =x- 
 
 Ans. dy = 
 
 2v / tf*-^ i (-rVat*- 
 
 30. y = x(l 4 x 
 
 31. y= (1 
 
 32. v = 
 
 _*). Ans. dy = 
 
 _ 
 
 v 1 
 
 a + VI 
 
 33. y = (1 + x)Vl - x. Ans. dy = 
 
 - a; 
 
 34. = 
 
DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 36 - y = 2x -1- V%x - 1 - V%z -I- etc., ad inf. 
 
 Squaring,^ 8 =2a;-l-V2aj- 1 - V&e - 1 - etc., ad inf. 
 Hence, y* = 2x 1 y, or y 9 + y = Zx 1. 
 
 Solving, y = - 5 
 
 /.<& = 5 
 
 III. DIFFERENTIATION OF TRANSCENDENTAL FUNCTIONS. 
 
 Definition of a Transcendental Function. 
 
 14. A transcendental function is one in which the rela- 
 tion between the function and its variable cannot be ex- 
 pressed by the ordinary operations of algebra. 
 
 Transcendental functions are divided into three classes* 
 Logarithmic, in which the relation is expressed by loga- 
 rithmic symbols; Exponential, in which the variable enters 
 an exponent; and Circular, in which the relation is ex- 
 pressed by means of trigonometric symbols. Thus, 
 
 y = log (ax* + #), is a logarithmic function, 
 y = (ax 2 + cY x ~ c , is an exponential function, 
 and y = sin 2 # 2tan#, is a trigonometric function. 
 
TRANSCENDENTAL FUNCTIONS. 25 
 
 Differential of a Logarithm. 
 15. It is shown in Algebra that 
 
 / ?/2 -yS ? /4 \ 
 
 log (1 + y) = M\JJ - J + ^ '-- + elc.J .... (1) 
 
 In which M is the modulus of the system and y any quan- 
 tity whatever. 
 
 Substitute for y the quantity , s being a function of #, 
 
 s 
 
 and we have, after reduction, 
 
 4- ds ,ds ds* ds* 
 
 But the logarithm of a quotient, is equal to the logarithm 
 of the dividend, diminished by the logarithm of the divi- 
 sor; changing the form of the first member and suppress- 
 ing all the terms in the second member, after the first, 
 (Art. 6), we have, 
 
 tLt 
 
 log (s + ds) - log s = M- ..... (3) 
 
 s 
 
 But the first member is the difference between two con- 
 secutive values of log s; it is therefore the differential of 
 the logarithm of s; hence, 
 
 fj~ 
 
 d(logs) = M- ..... (4) 
 
 s 
 
 That is, the differential of the logarithm of a quantity is 
 equal to the modulus into the differential of the quantity, 
 divided ly the quantity. 
 In analysis, Napierian logarithms are almost always used. 
 
26 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Denoting the Napierian logarithm by I, and remembering 
 that the modulus of this system is 1, we have, 
 
 The base of the Napierian system is represented by the 
 letter e, and its logarithm in that system is equal to 1. 
 
 Differential of an Exponential Function. 
 
 16. Let a be a constant quantity, s any function of z> 
 and assume 
 
 y = <f (i) 
 
 Taking the logarithms of both members of (1), we have, 
 ly sla (2) 
 
 Differentiating (2), we have, 
 
 dy 
 
 -^- la X ds (3) 
 
 y 
 
 "Replacing y by its value, and reducing, we have, 
 d(a s ) = triads (4) 
 
 Hence, to differentiate a quantity formed by raising a con- 
 stant quantity to a power denoted by a variable exponent, 
 multiply the quantity ly the logarithm of the root and the 
 differential of the exponent. 
 Again, let us have, 
 
 y=t s (1) 
 
 in which both t and s are functions of x. Taking the 
 logarithm of both members, we have, 
 
 ly=slt (2) 
 
TRANSCENDENTAL FUNCTIONS. 27 
 
 \\ r heiice, by differentiating both members, 
 
 f=W? ..... (3) 
 
 Replacing y by its value, clearing of fractions and reducing, 
 we have, 
 
 (4) 
 
 That is, to differentiate a quantity formed by raising a 
 variable quantity to a power whose exponent is variable, 
 differentiate first as though the root alone were variable, 
 then as though the exponent alone were variable, and take 
 the sur.i of the results. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Let y = l = l(a + x)-l(a-z); 
 
 (t x 
 
 d(a + cc) d(a x) dx dx 
 
 : ail = - -- -- 1 -- 
 
 a + x a x a + x a x 
 
 9, Let y = I A/ 1 = ^(1 + x) - \l(l - x); 
 
 1 dx 1 dx dx 
 
 .-. dy = - - + a = r ~~ 
 9 21 + x 21 x l x 
 
 3. Txjt y ~ (a) e ; /. ly = e x la, and = lae^ledx. 
 
 But, le 1, /. dy = (a} e e*ladx. Ans. 
 
28 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 4. Let y = l(lx) = T'x. 
 
 * 
 
 d(lx] dx 
 
 By the rule, dy = \ = r- 
 Ix xlx 
 
 5. y = #Z(a 4- #). ^4^5. tZ^ /( 4- #)(/ 4- 
 
 xdx 
 a + x 
 
 6. y = l(a + xY = %l(a 4- x). Ans. dy 
 
 l.y = <?(x-l). 
 
 8. y = e%T 2 - 2z + 2). 
 
 a 4- x 
 
 Ans. dy = e^atffa;. 
 . dy - e x x z dx. 
 
 , 
 Ans. dy ---- dx. 
 
 Ans. dy = e x \lx + a k 
 
 11. ?/ = / + a 4- 
 
 12. = 
 
 13. y = I 
 
 + 1 + a; 
 
 15. y=aT' 
 
 16. y=a lr . 
 
 Ans. dy = 
 
 dx dx 
 
 Ans. dy --- ._ 
 
 ,2- 
 
 1 _ ^2 
 
 -4w*. Jy 
 Ans. dy a 
 
 I + x . 
 dx. 
 
TRANSCENDENTAL FUNCTIONS. 29 
 
 Differentials of Circular Functions. 
 17. Assume the equation, 
 
 y = siux (1) 
 
 Giving to x the increment dx, and developing, we 
 have, 
 
 y + dy = sin (a; + dx) 
 
 = smxcosdx + cosxsmdx . . . . (2) 
 
 Because the arc dx is infinitely small, its cosine is equal 
 to 1, and its sine is equal to the arc itself. Hence. 
 
 y -f dy = smx + cosxdx (3) 
 
 Subtracting (1) from (3), and replacing y by its value, 
 we have, 
 
 d(smx) = cosxdx (a) 
 
 Equation (a) is true for all values of x\ we may there- 
 fore replace x by (90 x) ; this gives, 
 
 c/[sin(90 - a;)] = cos(90 - a;)c?(90 - x) (4) 
 
 Reducing, we have, 
 
 d(cosx) = siuxdz () 
 
 We have, from trigonometry, the relation, 
 
 sinrc 
 
 tana; = - - (5) 
 
 cosz 
 
 Differentiating both members, we have, 
 
 ,,, , cosxd (sinx) sinxd (cosx) 
 d(t&nx) = - s .', 
 
 v 3 
 
SO DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Performing indicated operations, and reducing by the 
 relation, sin 2 a; -f cos 8 z 1, we have, 
 
 dx 
 
 c?(tanz) = - - ..... (c) 
 
 1 2 
 
 Replacing x, in formula (c), by (90 x) and reducing, 
 
 we have, 
 
 rlv 
 
 d(cotx) = - -^- ..... (d) 
 
 Sill 2 X t 
 
 We have, from trigonometry, 
 
 ver-sinz = 1 cosx ..... (G) 
 co-versinz = 1 sinz ..... (7) 
 
 Differentiating (6) and (7), we have, 
 
 c?(ver-siiic) = siuxdx ..... (e) 
 d(co-\GYS\nx) = cosxdx ..... (/) 
 
 Wo have, from trigonometry, 
 
 secz = - ..... (8) 
 cosz 
 
 cosecx = -: ..... (0) 
 suix 
 
 Diflerentiating (8) and (9), we have, after reduction, 
 
 d(secx) = tsiiixsecxdx . 
 d(cosQCx) == cota; cosecxdx 
 
 The lettered formulas, from (a) to (/*) inclusive, are 
 sufficient for the differentiation of any direct circular 
 function. 
 
TRANSCENDENTAL FUNCTIONS. 31 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Let y = sin mo:. 
 
 dy = cosmx d(?)ix) = m cosmx . dx t 
 
 2. Let y = sm m x. 
 
 dy = m sin m ~ x dsmx = m &m m xcosxdx. 
 
 3. Let y = sm2x cosx. 
 
 dy = (d sm2x) (cosx) + (dcosx)(sm2x) 
 
 = 2cos2x cosx dx sin2x smx dx. 
 
 4. Let ?/ = l(sm z x) 2lsinx. 
 
 . dsinx 2cosx 7 
 
 dy = 3 : = ~. dx = 2cotx dx, 
 smx smx 
 
 5. Let y = j = ^(i + cosx) - %l(l - cosx). 
 
 V 1 cosay 
 
 _ 1 smxdx 1 sinxdx sinxdx dx 
 
 2 I + cosx 21 cosx ~ 1 cos*x ~ siuz* 
 
 6. Let y = e x cosx. 
 
 dy = e x d(cosx) + cosx d(e x ) e x (cosx smx) dx. 
 
 7. y = z-sinx + cos x. Ans. dy = xcosxdx. 
 
 8. y = 2xsinx + (2 x z )cosx. Ans. dy = x 2 sinxdx. 
 
 9. y = tana x. Ans. dy = ttm*xdx. 
 10. y = e cosx smx. Ans. dy = e cosx (cosx - sin*x)dx. 
 
 f cot^\ 
 
 11. y = 2l(&in.x) + coseca:. Ans. dy = [ 2cotx -- : -jdx, 
 
32 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 12. y = l(cosx + V 1 sinz). Ans. dy = V idx 
 
 . dx 
 
 - -) Ans.dy = -- . 
 
 1 smxj J cosx 
 
 14. y =- /[tan (45 + Jaj)]. 
 
 17 
 
 15. y sin(fe). Ans. dy = -cos(lx)dx. 
 
 Differentials of Inverse Circular Functions. 
 
 18. It is often convenient to regard an arc as a function 
 of one of its trigonometrical lines. Such functions are 
 called inverse circular functions, and are expressed by 
 such symbols as the following : 
 
 sin~~V> cos V> tan V*^, 
 
 which are read the arc ivliose sine is y> the arc whose cosine 
 is y, the arc whose tangent is y, etc. 
 
 Formulas for the differentiation of inverse circular func- 
 tions may be deduced from the lettered formulas of the last 
 article. Thus, from formula (), we find, 
 
 cosx 
 Tf we make sins = y, we have, 
 
 x = sin" 1 ?/, and cosx = Vl 
 Substituting these in (1), we have, 
 
TRANSCENDENTAL FUNCTIONS. 33 
 
 In like manner, from formula (b), we find, 
 
 smx 
 Making cosa; = y, we have, 
 
 x 
 
 = cos~ y, and sinz = Vl y* ; 
 
 Substituting these in (2), we have, 
 
 vr^ 
 
 By a similar course of reasoning we find from the re- 
 maining lettered formulas of Art. 17, the corresponding 
 formulas lor inverse circular functions, as given below: 
 
 _1 dy 
 
 dy 
 
 1 + y* 
 
 1 dy 
 
 d (versin y) = 
 
 -I,A *y 
 
 d(co versin 1 y) = (/"*) 
 
 dv 
 ,// 1..\ _ y /~i\ 
 
 yVy* - i 
 
 n ""> 
 
 2* 
 
34 
 
 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Let y cos~~ 1 # / v/l # 8 = cos" 
 
 - x * = 
 
 and A/I _ 
 
 /. dy 
 
 (1 - 
 
 Let = sin 
 
 1 
 
 ~ 
 
 ( 
 vrrP 
 
 dx 
 
 3. Let y = sin" 1 2x\/l %* 
 
 2(1 - 
 
 -* 
 
 _ 
 
 = tan 
 
 2dx 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF FUNCTIONS. 35 
 
 l /y //7 -^ / F\ & 
 
 6. y = V# 2 a; 2 4- flrsin" . Ans. dy = I I dx. 
 
 a \a + x/ 
 
 . _ 
 7. = versm A . 
 
 Vd^ 
 
 8. y = sec -1 2a;. 
 
 IV. SUCCESSIVE DIFFERENTIATION AND DEVELOPMENT 
 OF FUNCTIONS. 
 
 Successive Differentials. 
 
 19. The differential obtained immediately from the func- 
 tion is the first differential of the function ; the differential 
 of the first differential is the second differential of the func- 
 tion ; the differential of the second differential is the third 
 differential of the function, and so on ; differentials thus 
 obtained are called successive differentials, and the opera- 
 tion of obtaining them is called successive differentiation. 
 If a function be denoted by y, its successive differentials 
 will be denoted by the symbols dy, d*y, d*y, etc. Thus, 
 if y = ax 3 , we have, by successive differentiation, dx be- 
 ing constant, dy = 3ax 2 dx, d z y = Gaxdx 2 , d*y = 6adx 3 , 
 fry = 0. 
 
 Successive Differential Coefficients 
 
 20. If the differential of a function be divided by the 
 differential of the variable, the quotient is the first differ- 
 ential coefficient of the function ; the differential coefficient 
 of the first differential coefficient is the second differential 
 coefficient of the function, and so on. Differential coeffi- 
 
36 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 cients, derived in this manner, tire called successive differ- 
 ential coefficients. If a function of x be denoted by y, 
 its successive differential coefficients are denoted by the 
 
 symbols, -r, ~, -, etc. Thus, if we have, as before, 
 
 y ax 3 , we have, from the principles just explained, 
 
 It is to be observed that the successive differential 
 coefficients are entirely independent of the differential of 
 the variable ; so long therefore as this is infinitesimal, the 
 differential coefficients will in no way be affected by any 
 change in its absolute value. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 J^ind the successive differential coefficients of the follow- 
 ing functions: 
 
 1 . v = ax n . 
 
 . ( = nax^; = n(n - 
 
 n (n - l)(n - 2)ax n ~ ; etc 
 
 If n is a positive whole number, there will be a finite 
 number of successive differential coefficients; otherwise 
 their number is infinite. 
 
 2. y = ax 3 f bx*. 
 
 Ans. ^ = 
 dx 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF FUNCTIONS. 3? 
 
 3. = fl *. 
 
 4. y = since. 
 
 Ans. -/ cosx: -=-f- = sin ; 
 dx dx* 
 
 2. _ cosx: -5- smz: etc. 
 c?a; 3 ' 
 
 5. y = Z(a? + 1). 
 
 6. y = xe x . 
 
 McLaurin's Formula. 
 
 21. McLaurin's formula, is a formula for developing a 
 function of one variable into a series arranged according 
 to the ascending powers of that variable, the coefficients 
 being constant. Let y be any function of x, and assume 
 the development, 
 
 = A+Bx+ Cx* + Dx 9 + Ex* + etc ...... (1) 
 
38 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 It is required to find such values for A, B, C, etc., as will 
 make the assumed development true for all values of x. 
 Differentiating, and finding the successive differential co- 
 efficients of y, we have, 
 
 2Cx + Wtf + 4^ 3 + etc. ... (2) 
 + l.Z.Wx + 3.4^ 2 + etc. . . . (3) 
 
 ax 
 
 4- etc ....... (4) 
 
 etc., etc., etc. 
 
 But, by hypothesis, the value of y, and consequently the 
 values of its successive differential coefficients, are to be 
 true for all values of x\ hence, they must be so for x 0. 
 Making x ~ 0, in equations (1), (2), (3), etc., and denoting 
 what y becomes under that hypothesis by (y} ; what 
 
 ~ becomes by ( ) ; what =-? becomes by ( -7-^ j, and so 
 dx ' \clxJ dx z J \dx 2 J 
 
 on ; we have, 
 
 (y) =A; .:A = (y); 
 
 123-D- ' Z?= 
 
 T23\3& 
 
 etc., etc., etc. 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF FUNCTIONS. 39 
 
 Substituting these values in (I), we have, 
 dy\ x 
 
 i 1 T n I -* ,TK i 1 T o I - ^ r\ I ^ tt-/ 
 
 which is the formula required. Hence, to develop a 
 function of one variable in terms of that variable, find its 
 successive differential coefficients ; then make the variable 
 equal to in the function and its successive differential 
 
 coefficients, and substitute the results for (y), (~f\ \~di 
 etc., in formula (5). 
 
 Thus, let it be required to develop sinz into a series 
 arranged with reference to x. We have, 
 
 y = sinz, .-. (y) = 
 
 dy fdy 
 
 = cosx, .: [ -?- 
 dx \dx 
 
 = smz 
 
 dx~* = *y- i^J = 
 
 etc., etc., etc. 
 
 Hence, 
 
 In like manner we find, 
 
 SX =l - + - + etc 
 
 It is to be observed that (7) may be found from (6) by 
 differentiating and then dividing by dx. 
 
40 DIFFEKENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 McLau rin's Formula enables us to develop any function 
 of one variable when it can be developed in accordance 
 with the assumed law. But there are functions which 
 cannot be developed according to the ascending powers of 
 the variable ; in this case the function, or some of its suc- 
 cessive differential coefficients, become oo,when the variable 
 is made equal to 0. 
 
 As a general rule, when the application of a formula 
 gives an infinite result, the formula is inapplicable in that 
 particular case. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 1. y = (a + X) U . 
 
 Ans 
 
 n , n n-1 , n (n 1) n -2 . 
 . y = a +y# x+ 12 
 
 n (-!)(- 2) g .- 8gi 
 
 JL,</,{) 
 
 X 2 , X 3 X 4 * X 6 
 
 ^ + ^-- + - 
 
 3. y = a*. 
 
 4. y = 
 
 Make x* 2;, and devoir p; then replace z by its value. 
 
 x 2 x* x 6 5x* 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF FUNCTIONS. 41 
 
 5. y = e* x . 
 
 , x* 3x* Sx* 
 
 '= [+ * + - 
 
 1.2.3.4.5.6 
 6. ^ 
 
 r- n + etc. 
 
 Taylor's Formula. 
 
 22. Taylor's Formula is a formula for developing a 
 function of the sum of two variables into a series arranged 
 according to the ascending powers of one, with coefficients 
 that are functions of the other. 
 
 LEMMA. 
 
 If u' f(x -\- y), the differential coefficient of u' will be 
 the same, whether we suppose x to remain constant and y 
 to vary, or y to remain constant and x to vary, for the 
 form of the function is the same, whichever we suppose to 
 vary ; and it has been shown, in Art. 20, that the value of 
 the differential coefficient is independent of the value of 
 the differential of the variable. Hence, if x + y be in- 
 creased either by dx or by dy, and the differential coeffi- 
 cient taken, the result will be the same, which was to be 
 shown. 
 
 Let u' be a function of (x + y), and assume the devel- 
 opment, 
 
 u' = P+Qx + Rx* + Sx* + Tx* + etc ...... (1) 
 
 in which P, Q, R, etc., are functions of y. It is required 
 to find such values of P, Q, R, etc., as will make equation 
 
42 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 (1) true for all values of both x and y. Since the assumed 
 development is to be true for all values of x and t/, it must 
 be so for x = 0. Making x = in (1), and denoting what 
 u' becomes under this hypothesis, by u, we find, 
 
 That is, P is what the original function becomes, when 
 the leading variable is made equal to 0. 
 
 Finding the differential coefficient of u', under the sup- 
 position that x is constant and y variable, we have, 
 
 du' dP dQ t dR dS . 
 
 -= = -=- + -T^X +^-x* + -= x* + etc ...... (2) 
 
 dy dy dy dy ay 
 
 Again, finding the differential coefficient of u\ on the 
 supposition that y is constant and x variable, we have, 
 
 - = Q + 2l?x + 3Sx* + Tx 3 + etc ...... (3) 
 
 ux 
 
 But, the first members of (2) and (3) are equal, by the 
 lemma; hence their second members are also equal. If 
 we place them equal we have an identical equation, because 
 it is true for all values of x, and consequently the coeffi- 
 cients of the like powers of x in the two members are 
 equal to each other. Placing their coefficients equal, we 
 have the following results : 
 
 _dP . dn 
 
 V ~ dy ' - dy 9 
 
 ~~ 
 
 oo _ o_ 
 
 = ~ " 
 
 etc., etc., etc. 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF FUNCTIONS. 43 
 
 Substituting the values of P, Q, R, S, etc., in (1), we 
 have, 
 
 ; _ du x 
 
 f dy ' I + dy* ' + * ' 
 
 which is the required formula. Hence, to develop any 
 function of the sum of two variables, we make the leading 
 variable equal to 0, and find the successive differential 
 coefficients of the result; then substitute them in the 
 formula. 
 
 Thus, let it be required to develop (x + y} n into a 
 series arranged according to the ascending powers of y. 
 Making y = 0, we have, 
 
 u = x n , 
 
 etc., etc., etc. 
 
 Substituting these in (4), we have, 
 
 (x + y) n = z n + ~x n -\j + '-i M 
 
 n(n 1 (n 2) n * 
 
 - -- -- L x n d3 + etc. 
 
44 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 This is the binomial formula, in which n is any 
 constant. 
 
 The formula is applicable to every function of the sum 
 of two variables; but it sometimes happens that certain 
 values of the variable entering the coefficients make the 
 first term or some of its successive differential coefficients 
 infinite ; for these particular values, the function cannot 
 be expressed by a series of the proposed form. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Develop the following functions in terms of y. 
 
 1. u' = sm(x + y). 
 
 Making y = 0, we have, u = sinz ; 
 
 du d z u 
 
 ./.-=- = cosx-j -j 9 smx: etc.; 
 dx dx 2 
 
 it y* y 3 
 
 nence, u = sin# -f cosx^- since ~- cosx-^-r- 
 
 1 l./O l.-C.d 
 
 Making x = 0, whence since = 0, and cosx = + 1, we have, 
 n - siny = y - ^ + 1 ^ 4 , + etc., as already shown. 
 
 2. u =Z(a? +y). 
 
 Ans. u' = Ix + - |^ 4- ~ - - + etc, 
 x 2x* 3x 3 4o; 4 
 
 3. w' = 
 
 Ans. u' = a*(l + (la)y + ( ^/ 2 +^V + etc.). 
 
I M T L1C IT F U X CT 1 XS. 
 
 4. u' = cos(x -f ?/) 
 
 / y v 2 
 
 Ans. u = COBX smar cosx 
 
 + SUM r-n + COSX 
 
 V. DIFFERENTIATION OF FUNCTIONS OF TWO VARIABLES, 
 AND OF IMPLICIT FUNCTIONS. 
 
 Geometrical Representation of a Function of two Variables. 
 
 23. It may be shown, as in Art. 3, that every function 
 of two variables represents the ordinate of a surface of 
 which those variables are the corresponding abscissas. If 
 the vertical ordinate be taken as the function, it may be 
 expressed by the equation, 
 
 In this equation, x and y are independent variables, and 
 each may vary precisely as though the other were constant. 
 To illustrate, let PQR 
 be the surface whose 
 equation is (1). 
 
 If, for a given value 
 of y as OS, we suppose 
 x to vary, equation (1) 
 will represent a section 
 of the surface parallel 
 to the plane xz and at 
 the distance OB from 
 it. If for a given value 
 of x, as OA 9 we sup- Fig>2 . 
 
 pose y to vary, equa- 
 tion (1) will represent a section parallel to the plane yi 
 
46 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 and at the distance OA from it. These sections will be 
 called parallel sections, and the corresponding planes will 
 be called planes of parallel section. The planes A CD 
 and BEF determine the ordinate KK' = z. Let A CD 
 A'C'D', be consecutive planes of parallel section, at a dis- 
 tance from each other equal to dx, and BEF, B'E'F', also 
 consecutive planes of parallel section, at a distance from 
 each other equal to dy. These planes determine four 
 ordinates KK', LL', NN', and MM', which may be de- 
 noted by the symbols z, z', z", and z'". Of these, z and z' 
 are consecutive when x alone varies, z and z" are consecu- 
 tive when y alone varies, and z and z'" are consecutive when 
 both x and y vary. 
 
 Differentials of a Function of two Variables. 
 
 24. The difference between two consecutive states of the 
 function when x alone varies is called the partial differ- 
 ential with respect to x, and is denoted by the symbol 
 (dz) x ; the difference between two consecutive states when 
 
 y alone varies is called the partial differential with respect 
 to y, and is denoted by the symbol (dz) ; the difference 
 between two consecutive states when both x and y v#ry is 
 called the total differential, and is denoted by the ordinary 
 symbol, dz without a subscript letter. Let us assume the 
 figure and notation of Art. 23. We have, from the defini- 
 tion, 
 
 z' = z + (dz) x ; whence, by differentiation, 
 
 = (*),+ (<*'*),,,, ..... (2) 
 The symbol (d z z) x y indicates the result obtained by dif- 
 ferentiating z as though x were the only variable, and then 
 
IMPLICIT FUNCTIONS. 47 
 
 differentiating that result as though y were the only varia- 
 ble, the order of the subscript letters indicating the order 
 of differentiation. From what precedes, we also have, 
 
 z'" = z' + (dz') y ; 
 
 substituting for z' and (dz') , their values taken from (2), 
 
 we have 
 
 transposing z to the first member, replacing z'" z by its 
 value dz, and neglecting the part (d*z) x , because it is an 
 
 infinitesimal of the second order, we have, finally, 
 
 (3) 
 
 Hence, the total differential is equal to the sum of the par- 
 tial differentials. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. z = ax* + by 3 . 
 
 (dz) x 2axdx-, (dz) y = 3by 2 dy .*. dz = Zaxdx + 3by*dy. 
 
 2. z = ax z y 5 . Ans. dz = 2ay 3 xdx + 3ax 2 y z dy. 
 
 3. z = x&. Ans. dz yx y ~ 1 dx + x y lxdy. 
 
 Notation employed to designate Partial Differential 
 Coefficients. 
 
 25. From the nature of the case, there can be no such 
 thing as a differential coefficient of a function of two va- 
 riables; but the quotient of a partial differential by the 
 
48 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 differential of the corresponding variable, is called a par- 
 tial differential coefficient The form of the symbol indi- 
 cates the variable with reference to which the function has 
 been differentiated, and no subscript letter is required. 
 Thus, in Example 2, Art. 24, we have, 
 
 |? = 2aij*x, and ^ = 3ax*y*. 
 
 A similar notation is employed for partial differential 
 coefficients of a higher order, as will be seen in the follow- 
 ing article. 
 
 Successive Differentiation of Functions of two Variables. 
 
 26. The second differential of a function of two varia- 
 bles is found by differentiating the first differential by the 
 rules already given. The third differential comes from the 
 second in the same manner that the second comes from 
 the first, and so on. In finding the higher partial differen- 
 tials, the result obtained by differentiating the function 
 first with respect to x, and that result with respect to y, is 
 the same as though we had differentiated the function first 
 with respect to y, and the result with respect to x. For, 
 from Art. 24, we have, 
 
 "' = z' + (dz') y = z + (dz) x + (dz} y + (dt)^ 
 And in like manner, we have, 
 
 *'" = *" + (M\ = z + (dz) y + (dz) x + (<**),, . 
 Equating these values of z'", and reducing, we and, 
 
IMPLICIT FUNCTIONS. 49 
 
 which was to be shown. From equation (4), by an exten- 
 sion of the notation in Art. 25, we have, 
 
 j(dz\ 7 (^\ 
 
 d*z _ d*z Qr \dx) = C \dy) 
 dxdy dydx dy dx 
 
 From what precedes, we have, 
 
 \ J 
 
 * ** = (&*)* . + (<***)* + (**) + (**) 
 
 , y ,, y ,, , 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Given, z = z*y* 9 to find d z z. 
 x 
 
 Given, z = y 3 ^, to find 
 
50 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Extension to three or more Variables 
 
 27. If we have a function of three or more independent 
 variables, we may find its differential by differentiating 
 separately with respect to each variable, and taking the 
 sum of the partial differentials thus obtained. The second 
 and higher differentials are found in an entirely analogous 
 manner. 
 
 Definition of Explicit and Implicit Functions. 
 
 28. An explicit function, is one in which the value of 
 the function is directly expressed in terms of the variable. 
 
 Thus, y = \/2rx x 2 , is an explicit function. An implicit 
 function, is one in which the value of the function ife 
 not directly given in terms of the variable. Thus, in the 
 equation, 
 
 ay z + bxy + ex 2 + d = ; 
 
 y is an implicit function of x. Implicit functions are 
 generally connected with their variables by one or more 
 equations. When these equations are solved the implicit 
 function becomes explicit. 
 
 Differentials of Implicit Functions. 
 
 29. The differential of an implicit function may be 
 found without first finding the function itself. For, if 
 we differentiate both members of the first equation, we 
 shall thus find a new equation, which, with the given one, 
 will enable us to find either the differential, or the differ- 
 ential coefficient of the function. For example, suppose 
 we have ihe equation, 
 
 I * -h 2xy 4- a" - a 9 = . . . . (1) 
 
IMPLICIT FUNCTIONS. 51 
 
 to find the differential coefficient of y. Differentiating 
 (1), and dividing by 2, we have, 
 
 ydy + xdy + ydx + xdx = (2) 
 
 Finding the value of --. we have, 
 dx 
 
 4. i 
 
 dx 
 Again, let us have the relation, 
 
 xy = m (1) 
 
 to find the value of C -j-. Differentiating (1), we 
 
 xdy -f ydx = (2) 
 
 Whence, 
 
 iH=-l < 3 > 
 
 But from (1), we have, 
 
 ~x ~ X*' 
 Substituting in (3), we find, 
 
 dv m 
 
 - 
 dx x* 
 
 (4) 
 ^ ' 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Find the first aau second differential coefficients of y 
 in the following implicit functions: 
 
52 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 We have, 
 
 also, 
 
 + 3y*d*y-3d*y=0, 
 
 y 
 
 _ 
 ' ~dx* ~ ly* ' dx* ~ 9 * (l- 
 
 2. ?2 - % mX + a;2 _ ^ = Q. 
 
 a; , 
 
 and -- = 
 
 . - -- , -5- - - 
 
 dx y mx dx 9 (y mx) 
 
PART II. 
 
 APPLICATIONS OF THE DIFFEKENTIAL 
 CALCULUS. 
 
 I. TANGENTS AND ASYMPTOTES. 
 
 Geometrical Representation of the First Differential 
 Coefficient. 
 
 30. It has been shown (Art. 3), that any function of 
 one variable maybe represented by the ordinate of a curve, 
 of which that variable is the cor- 
 responding abscissa. We have also 
 seen (Art. 5), that an element of 
 the curve, PQ, does not differ from 
 a straight line. This line, prolonged 
 toward T, is tangent to the curve 
 at P. The angle that the tangent 
 makes with the axis of X is equal 
 to RPQ; denoting it by 6, and 
 remembering that the tangent of the angle- ;it the base 
 of a right angled triangle is equal to the piTjH-ndicular 
 divided by the base, we have, 
 
 = 
 
 dx 
 
 The tangent of d is taken as the measure of tlu* slope, 
 not only of the tangent, but also of the curve at the point 
 P. Hence, the slope of a curve, at any point, in 
 
54 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 by the first differential coefficient of the ordinate at that 
 point. 
 
 The slope is positive or negative, that is, the curve slopes 
 upward or downward, according as the first differential 
 coefficient is plus, or minus. 
 
 Applications. 
 
 31. The principle just demonstrated enables us to find 
 the point of a curve, at which the tangent makes a givm 
 angle with the axis of x. 
 
 Thus, let it be required to find the point on a given 
 parabola at which the tangent makes an angle of 45 with 
 the axis. Assume the equation of the parabola, 
 
 dii p 
 
 .'. -r = - 
 dx y 
 
 Placing this equal to 1, we have, 
 
 - = 1, or y = p. 
 
 y 
 
 But y p, is the ordinate through the focus. Hence, the 
 required point is at the upper extremity of the ordinate 
 through the focus. 
 
 Again, let it be required to find the point at which a tan- 
 gent to the ellipse is parallel to the axis of x. Assume the 
 equation, 
 
 > dy _ _ l*x_ 
 '* Tx ~ ~ a*y 
 
 Placing this equal to 0, we have, 
 
 -'&* 
 
TANGENTS AND ASYMPTOTES. 55 
 
 which can only be satisfied by making x 0; this, in the 
 equation of the curve, gives y = b. Hence, the tangent 
 at either vertex of the conjugate axis fulfills the given 
 condition. 
 
 Again, to find where the tangent to an hyperbola is per- 
 pendicular to the axis; assume the equation of the curve, 
 
 whence, by the rule, 
 
 d-tf l z x 
 
 -y- =-r- = co ; .*. y = 0, x = a. 
 
 dx a z y 
 
 Hence, the tangent at either extremity of the transverse 
 axis, fulfills the given condition. 
 
 Equations of the Tangent and Normal. 
 
 32. Let P be a point of the curve whose co-ordinates are 
 x", y" ; then will the equation of a straight line through 
 it, be of the form, 
 
 y - y" = a(x - x") . . . . (1) 
 
 in which a is the slope. If we make a equal the tangent 
 of RPQ, the line will be tangent to the curve. But the 
 
 tangent of RPQ is -r-fr\ hence, we have, for the equation 
 of a tangent line, 
 
 If we make a equal to minus the reciprocal of the tan- 
 gent of RPQ, the line will be perpendicular to the tangent, 
 
56 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 that is, it will, be normal to the curve; hence, we have, for 
 the equation of a normal line, 
 
 (3) 
 
 Iii these equations x and y are general co-ordinates of 
 the lines, and x", y" are the co-ordinates of the point of 
 contact. 
 
 Let it be required to find the equation of a tangent to 
 an ellipse. We found, in the last article, the value of 
 
 -j- = -- j- ; substituting for x and y the particular values 
 u" and y", and putting the result in (2), we find, 
 
 l>*z" ', ,,x 
 
 y ~ y = ~~^/ f(x ~ x) > 
 
 whence, by reduction, 
 
 Making a = I, in this equation, we have, 
 
 yy" + xx" = a 2 , 
 
 which is the equation of a tangent to a circle. 
 To find the equation of a normal to an ellipse we substi- 
 
 tute the value of yr in equation (3). which gives, 
 
 Mak ng a I, we have, 
 
 x 
 which is the equation of a normal to a circle. 
 
TANGENTS AND ASYMPTOTES. 57 
 
 If, in equation (2), we make y 0, the coi responding 
 value of x x" will express the length of the subtangent, 
 counted from the foot of the ordinate through the point 
 of contact; denoting this by S.T., we have, 
 
 ,T=-y" .(6) 
 
 9 dy" 
 
 If, in equation (3), we make y = 0, the corresponding 
 value of x x" will express the length of the subnormal, 
 counted from the foot of the ordinate through the point 
 of contact; denoting this by 8.N., we have, 
 
 (7) 
 
 Substituting in (6) and (7) the values of -y^7 taken from 
 
 Cv\b 
 
 the equation of the ellipse, we have, 
 
 Asymptotes. 
 
 33. An asymptote to a curve, is a line that continually 
 approaches the curve and becomes tangent to it at an 
 infinite distance. The characteristics of an asymptote 
 are, that it is tangent to the curve at a point that is infi- 
 nitely distant, and that it cuts one or both axes at a finite 
 distance from the origin. 
 
 To ascertain whether a curve has an asymptote, assume 
 the equation of the tangent (Art. 32), and in it make 
 x, and y, successively equal to 0. 
 
 3* 
 
58 
 
 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 A 
 
 Fig. 4. 
 
 Jn this manner we find, 
 4J) = y" - *"3L and 
 
 dy" 
 
 We then find -77 from the _ 
 dx 
 
 equation of the curve, substi- 
 tute it in (I) and make the hypothesis that places the 
 point (x", y' 1 ) at an infinite distance. If this supposition 
 make either AD or A T finite, the curve has an asymptote, 
 otherwise not. 
 
 Let it be required to find whether the hyperbola has an 
 
 dn" b z c" 
 asymptote. AYe have found (Art. 31), - = -r- Jfl which 
 
 J ' dx a 2 y 
 
 in (1) gives, 
 
 Whence, by reduction, 
 
 ff i 
 ~-^, nu&AT = 
 
 (3) 
 
 or, 
 
 y 
 
 The only hypothesis that places a point of the hyperbola 
 at an infinite distance is y" GO , and x" = GO ; both 
 these sets of values, ir. (4), make AD and A T equal to 0. 
 Hence, the hyperbola has two asymptotes, both passing 
 through the centre. 
 
TANGENTS AND ASYMPTOTES. 59 
 
 To find whether the parabola has an asymptote, make 
 ' = in (1) ' whence > 
 
 AD = y" ~ ] ~r= and AT = -x". 
 
 \J \J 
 
 If we make y" GO , and x" = oo , to put the point of 
 contact at an infinite distance, we find both AD and AT 
 equal to oo , which shows that the parabola has no asymp- 
 tote. 
 
 Order of Contact. 
 
 34. Two lines have a contact of the first order, when 
 they have two consecutive points in common. The first of 
 these is the point of contact ; this point is common to both 
 lines, and, as we have just seen, the first differential coef- 
 ficients of the ordinates of the two lines at this -point are 
 equal. Conversely, if two lines have a common point, and 
 if the first differential coefficients of the ordinates of the 
 lines at that point are equal, the lines have a contact of the 
 first order. 
 
 Two lines have a contact of the second order, when they 
 have three consecutive points in common. The first of 
 the three is the point of contact, and because the lines have 
 three consecutives ordinates common, the first and second 
 differential coefficients of their ordinates at this point are 
 equal. Conversely, if two lines have a common point, and 
 the first and second differential coefficients of their ordi- 
 nates at that point equal, the lines have a contact of the 
 second order. 
 
 In like manner it may be shown, if two lines have a 
 point in common, and n successive differential coefficients 
 of their ordinates at that point equal, that the lines have 
 
60 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 a contact of the w th order, n being any positive whole 
 number. 
 
 If a line oe applied so as to cut a given line in an even 
 number of points, it will, just before the first, and just 
 after the last, lie on the same side of the given line ; and 
 this is true when the points of secancy are consecutive, in 
 which case the lines have a contact of an odd order. 
 Hence, if two lines have a contact of an odd order, they do 
 not intersect at the point of contact. If the applied line cut 
 the given line in an odd number of points, it will, just 
 before the first, and just after the last, lie on opposite sides 
 of the given line; and this is also true when the points of 
 secancy are consecutive ; hence, if two lines have a contact 
 of an even order, they intersect at the point of contact. 
 
 If the applied line be straight, and the contact of the 
 n th order, the given curve will have n consecutive values 
 of dy, equal to each other. If each of these be taken from 
 the next in order, the differences will be 0, that is, the 
 curve will have n 1 consecutive values of d 2 y equal to 
 0. In like manner, we may show that it has n 2 consec- 
 utive values of d*y equal to 0, and so on, to the (n 4- l) lh 
 different al of y, which will not be 0, but will be plus or 
 minus, according as the (n 4- l) th value of dy, counting 
 from the point of contact, is greater or less than the n th 
 value of dy. Conversely, if the (n + l) th differential of y 
 is plus, the (n 4- l) th value of dy is greater than the w th ; 
 if minus the (n 4- l) tb value of dy is less than the n ih . 
 
 II. OURVATUKE. 
 Direction of Curvature. 
 
 35. Let KL be a curve, whose concavity is turned 
 downward, that is, in the direction of negative ordi- 
 
CURVATURE. 
 
 Cl 
 
 nates ; let AP, BQ, and CQ' be consecutive ordinates, Alt 
 and BO being equal to dx ; prolong PQ toward T. Then 
 will RQ, and R Q', be consecutive values of dy, and con- 
 sequently their difference, R'Q' RQ, will be the value of 
 d*y at P. The right angled triangles, PRQ, and QR'S, 
 have their bases, and the angles at their bases, equal ; hence, 
 their altitudes, RQ, 
 and R 8, are equal ; 
 but R'Q' is less than 
 R'S, because Q' is 
 nearer QO than S ; 
 hence, R'Q' is less 
 than RQ, and con- 
 sequently the value 
 of d*y is negative. 
 Conversely, if d~i/ 
 is negative, R'Q' is 
 less than H'S, and the curve in passing from P is concave 
 doivmvard. In like manner, it may be shown that the 
 curve is concave upward at P, when d z y is positive. Be- 
 cause the sign of the second differential coefficient is the 
 same as that of the second differential, we have the follow- 
 ing rule for determining the direction of curvature, in 
 passing from any point toward the right, 
 
 Find the second differential coefficient of the ordinate at- 
 the point ; if this is negative, the curve is concave down- 
 ward, if positive, it is concave upward. 
 
 We may regard y as the independent variable, and find 
 the second differential coefficient of x; if this be negative 
 at any point, the concavity is turned toward the left, if 
 positive, toward the right. 
 
 Example. Let it be required to determine the direction 
 of curvature at any point of a parabola. 
 
62 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Assume the equation, y 2 = 2px ; whence, by differentia- 
 tion and reduction, 
 
 p* 
 
 p 
 
 The first of these is negative for positive values of y, and 
 positive for negative values of y ; hence, the part of the 
 curve above the axis of X is concave downward, and the 
 part below is concave upward. The second is positive for 
 all values of x andy; hence, the curve is everywhere con- 
 cave toward the right. 
 
 If the tangent at P have a contact of the n ih order, n 
 jeing greater than 1, the second differential coefficient of 
 y at that point will be (Art. 34). In this case it may 
 be shown, as above, that the curve bends downward in 
 passing toward the right, when the (n + l) th value of dy, 
 counting from P, is less than the n th value of dy, and up- 
 ward when the (n + l) th value of dy is greater than the n th . 
 The former condition is satisfied when the (n + 1)"' differ- 
 ential coefficient of?/ is negative, and the latter when it is 
 positive (Art. 34). 
 
 Amount of Curvature. 
 
 36. The change of direction of a curve in passing from 
 an element to the one next in order, is the angle between 
 the second element and the prolongation of the first. This 
 angle is called the angle of contingence, it is negative when 
 the curve bends downward, and positive when it bends 
 upward. The total change of direction in passing over any 
 arc is equal to the algebraic sum of the angles of contin- 
 gence at every point of that arc. 
 
 The curvature of a curve is the rate at which it changes 
 direction. When the curvature is uniform, as in the 
 
CURVATURE. 
 
 63 
 
 circle, it is measured by the total change of direction in 
 any arc. divided by the length of that arc. In any curve 
 whatever the curvature may be regarded as uniform for 
 an infinitely small arc; hence, the curvature at any point 
 of a curve, is equal to the angle of contingence at that 
 point, divided by the corresponding element of the curve. 
 Denoting the angle of contingence by dd, the correspond- 
 ing element by ds, and the curvature by c, we have, 
 
 Oscillatory Circle. 
 
 37. An oscillatory circle, to a given curve, is a circle that 
 has three consecutive points in common with that curve. 
 Thus, if the circle whose centre is C, pass through the 
 three consecutive points P, Q, and R, of the curve, KQ, it 
 is osculatory to that curve at P. 
 
 The circle and curve have two consecutive tangents, PT 
 and QT, and 
 two consecutive 
 normals, P C and 
 QC, in common; 
 they have also 
 the angle of con- 
 tingence at Q, in 
 common ; hence, 
 they have the 
 same curvature 
 at the point P. 
 Because P C and 
 QC are perpen- Fi e- 6 - 
 
 dicular to PT, anl QT, their included angle, is equal to 
 
64 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 the angle of contingency dd; hence, PQ = CP X d\ or 
 denoting PQ by ds and CP by 7?, we have, ds = Held, or, 
 
 --- 
 
 cfe 5 
 
 This equation ^shows that the curvature of a curve at 
 any point is equal to the reciprocal of the radius of the 
 oscillatory circle at that point; for this reason, the radius 
 of the oscillatory circle is called the radius of curvature. 
 
 Radius of Curvature. 
 
 38. If we denote the inclination of the tangent, FT, to 
 the axis of X by 6, the angle of contingence, TQT, equal to 
 
 PCQ, will be equal tod&; but we know that 4 = tan" 1 ^; 
 
 dx 
 differentiating, we have, 
 
 fg 
 
 j _ dx dxd z y 
 
 ~ i 51 = d y* + ' dx * ' 
 
 * dx* 
 
 Finding the value of R from equation (1), Art. 37, ana 
 replacing ds by its value, from Art. 5, we have, 
 
 _ 
 
 ~dxd*y 
 
 Dividing both terms of the second member by c7.c 3 , and 
 denoting the first differential coefficient of y by q', and its 
 second differential coefficient by q", we have, 
 
 (2) 
 
CURVATURE. 65 
 
 When the curve bends downward, dd is negative, and 
 consequently R is negative; when the curve bends upward, 
 both arepositive. 
 
 It is sometimes convenient to regard R, or some other 
 quantity on which R depends, as the independent variable. 
 In this case both dy and dx are variable, and we have, 
 
 7 dxd 9 i/ dyd z x 
 dx* + rfy ~ ; 
 
 and this in (1), Art. 37, gives, 
 
 _ 
 
 dxd*y-dyd*x ' ' ( } 
 
 Example. Required the value of R for the parabola. 
 Assume the equation, y 2 = 2px. 
 
 By differentiation and reduction, we have, 
 
 dy p d 2 ?/ p* 
 
 -r = <1 = -9 and -^ = q" = J 
 dx y dx 2 y s ' 
 
 substituting the.e in (2), we have, 
 
 2 J P 
 
 The value of R is least possible when y = 0, increases 
 as y increases, and becomes oo when y = QO . Hence, the 
 curvature of the parabola is greatest at the vertex, and 
 diminishes as the curve recedes from the vertex. 
 
 Co-ordinates of the Centre of the Osculatory Circle. 
 
 39. In the right angled triangle, PHC, PH is perpen- 
 dicular to ED, and PC to EP ; hence, the angle, HPC, is 
 
(16 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 equal to 6. Denoting the abscissa, AC, by a, and the ordi- 
 nate, DC, by /?, we have, 
 
 a = AH+ HO, and = BP - HP ..... (1) 
 
 All and BP are the co-ordinates of P, denoted by x and 
 y; IIP is equal to PCcosJ, and HC to PCsind; substi- 
 tuting for PC, or 7?, its value found in tlu last article, re- 
 membering that it is negative in the case under considera- 
 tion. (Art. 38), replacing sin, and cos4, by their values 
 taken from Art. 5, and reducing, we have, 
 
 dx* + dy* du 
 
 - -- ~- = x 
 
 \ , 
 }q 
 J 1 
 
 ' 
 
 . 
 
 d z y dx 
 
 ' ft) 
 
 Locus of the Centre of Curvature. 
 
 40. A line drawn through the centres of the oscillatory 
 circles at every point of a curve is called the evolnte of that 
 curve, and the given curve, with respect to its evolute, is 
 called an involute. If we consider any radius of curvature 
 of a curve, we see that it intersects the one that precedes 
 and the one that follows it, and the distance between the 
 points of intersection is an element of the evolute ; hence, 
 the radius is normal to the involute, and tangent to the 
 evolute. We also see that the difference between two con- 
 secutive radii of curvature is equal to the corresponding 
 element of the evolute; hence, the difference between any 
 two radii of curvature of a given curve is equal to the cor- 
 responding arc of the evolute. 
 
 The evolute of a curve may be constructed by drawing 
 normals to the curve, and then drawing *.i curve tangent 
 
CUKVATURE. 6? 
 
 to them all: the closer the normals, the more accurate will 
 be the construction. An involute may be constructed by 
 wrapping a thread round the evolute, holding it tense, 
 and then unwrapping it. Every point of the thread de- 
 scribes a curve, which is an involute of the given evolute. 
 Practically, the evolute is cut out of a board, or other solid 
 material. In this manner the outlines of the teeth of 
 wheels are sometimes marked out, the circle being taken 
 as an evolute. 
 
 Equation of the Evolute of a Curve. 
 
 41. The equation of the evolute of any curve may be 
 found by combining the equation of the curve with form- 
 ulas (2), Art. 39, and eliminating x and y. The method 
 will be best illustrated \>y an example; thus, let it be re- 
 quired to find the equation of the evolute of the common 
 parabola. 
 
 = ^.and n 1 ' ~ 
 
 y y/ 3 
 
 substituting these in (2), Art. 39, we have, after reduction, 
 
 We have already found a' = .and n 1 ' ~ (Art. 38) ; 
 
 y y/ 3 
 
 a x + - -- = 3x + p, *. X -(a p), 
 
 6 
 
 * 
 
 substituting the values of x and y in the equation y 2 = 
 we have, 
 
 which is the equation required. It is the equation oi a 
 semi-cubic parabola. 
 
68 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Find the equation of the evolute of an ellipse 
 
 Am. (aa)* + (?)* = (a* - b 
 
 2. Find the equation of the evolute of an hyperbola. 
 
 Ans. (aaft - (bpft = (a* + b 
 
 3. Find the radius of curvature of an ellipse. 
 
 r/4/,4 
 
 4. Find the radius of curvature of an equilateral hyper- 
 bola referred to its asymptotes, the equation being xy m. 
 
 (m* + ?; 4 )* 
 Ans. o = s -^-. 
 
 ) , 1 1 .-i 
 
 III. SINGULAR POINTS OF CURVES. 
 
 Definition of a Singular Point. 
 
 42. A SINGULAR POINT of a curve, is a point at which the 
 curve presents some peculiarity not common to other 
 points. The most remarkable of these are, points of in- 
 flexion, cusps, multiple points, and conjugate points. 
 
 Points of Inflexion. 
 
 43. A POINT OF INFLEXION is a point at which the curva 
 tu re changes, from being concave downward to being con- 
 cave upward, or the reverse. 
 
 Inasmuch as the direction of curvature is determined by 
 the sign of the second differential coefficient of the ordi- 
 
felXGULAK POINTS OF CURVES. Oi* 
 
 nate, it follows that this sign must change from to -f , 
 or from + to , in passing a point of inflexion. But a 
 quantity can only change sign by passing through 0, or co' . 
 Hence, at a point of inflexion the second differential coef- 
 ficient of y must be either 0, or co . If the corresponding 
 values of x and y are such, that for values immediately 
 preceding and following them, the second differential coef- 
 ficient has contrary signs, then will each set of such values 
 correspond to a point of inflexion. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. To find the points of inflexion on the curve whose 
 equation is y = b + (x a) 3 . 
 
 We find, -=-| = G(x a) ; this, put equal to 0, gives 
 clx 
 
 x == a, which, in the equation of the curve, gives y = b. 
 When x < a, the second differential coefficient is negative, 
 and when x > a, it is positive. Hence, the point whose 
 co-ordinates are a and b, is a point of inflexion. 
 
 2. To find the points of inflexion on the curve whose 
 equation is y =. b -f- T V (x a) 5 > 
 
 d^u 
 We find ; 3^ = 2 (x <?) 3 ; this placed equal to 0, gives 
 
 x = a f whence, y b. When x < a, the second differen- 
 tial coefficient is negative, and when x > a, it is positive. 
 Hence, the point whose co-ordinates are a and b, is a point 
 of inflexion. 
 
 3. Find the co-ordinates of the points of inflexion on 
 
 the curve whose equation is y %r 
 
 o o _ 
 
 Ans. x 7 r, and y ^r Vs> 
 
70 
 
 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 1. Find the co-ordinates of the points of inflexion on 
 
 X 2 (a 2 x 2 } 
 
 the line whose equation is y = - ^ -. 
 
 ,1/7 5 
 
 Ans. x = -a y t>, and y = #. 
 o oo 
 
 Cusps. 
 
 44. A CUSP is a point at which two branches terminate, 
 being tangential to each other. There are two species of 
 cusps; the ceratoid, named from its resemblance to the 
 horns of an animal, and the ramphoid, named from its 
 resemblance to the beak of a bird. The first is shown at 
 E, and the second at A. 
 
 The method of determining the position and nature of a 
 cusp point will be best shown by examples. 
 
 1. Let us take the curve whose equation isy=b (x a)i' 
 From this we find, * 
 
 du . , d*y 
 For x = a, -+ = 0, and -=-f = 
 ' dx dx* 
 
 oo . For x < a, both are 
 
 imaginary, as is also the value of y. For x > a, both are 
 real, and each has two values, one plus and the other 
 minus. Hence, the point whose 
 co-ordinates are a and b is a cusp 
 of the first species. 
 
 2. Let us take the curve whose 
 
 equation is y x 2 #f. ' 
 From it we find, 
 
 Fig. 7. 
 
 dy , 5 } ,d*y , 15 J 
 
 ^ y/y _1_ _/* Qfir] -. 9 -+- T 6 
 
 r^ /CX m ~ J, , ctllU. : r /v -^- ~r Jj 
 
 ///* > ' /A>>2 
 
SINGULAR POINTS OF CURVES. 
 
 71 
 
 From the given equation we see that no part of the 
 curve lies to the left of the axis of y, and that there are 
 two infinite branches to the right of that axis. 
 
 The values of -- are both at the origin ; and at that 
 
 CLOu 
 
 d 2 ?/ 
 point both values of -r-| are positive ; hence, the origin is 
 
 a cusp of the second species. 
 
 A discussion of the above equations shows that the 
 upper branch has its concavity always upward ; the second 
 
 64 
 branch has a point of inflexion for, x = ; its slope is 
 
 225 
 
 for x = 
 
 __ 
 25 
 
 and it cuts the axis of x 
 
 at the distance 1 from the origin ; from 
 the origin to the point of inflexion, 
 it curves upward; after that point it 
 curves downward. The shape of the 
 curve is indicated in the figure. 
 
 For the ceratoid the values of the 
 second differential coefficient of y have 
 contrary signs, for the ramphoid they have the same sign. 
 
 Fie?. 8 . 
 
 \ 
 
 Multiple Points. 
 
 45. A MULTIPLE POINT is a point where two or more 
 branches of a curve intersect, or 
 touch each other. 
 
 If the branches intersect, -p will 
 dx 
 
 have as many values at that point 
 as there are branches ; if they 
 are tangent, these values will be 
 equal. 
 
 Fig. a. 
 
72 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Take the curve whose equation is y z = x 2 x*. 
 
 For every value of x there are two values of y equal 
 with contrary signs; hence, the curve is symmetrically 
 situated with respect to the axis of x. For x 0, we have 
 y zfc ; hence, both branches pass through the origin. 
 From the equation, we find, 
 
 c lli ----- ! 2^ 2 
 
 dx~y ' y 'vT^^^VT^^' 
 
 rl /it 
 
 For x = 0, -j- = 1, hence the origin is a multiple poinr, 
 
 by intersection. The curve is limited in both direc- 
 tions. 
 
 2. Take the curve whose equation is y = =fc \/x* + x*. 
 
 The two branches are. symmetrically placed with respect 
 to the axis of x, both pass through the origin, forming a 
 loop on the left and extending to infinity on the right. 
 We find, from the equation of the curve, 
 
 dy _ 5x* 4- 4r 3 _ 5x 2 + x 
 dx ~ ~ " 
 
 For x 0, we have -^ = ; hence, the origin is a mul- 
 dx 
 
 tiple point, the branches being tangent to each other and 
 to the axis of x. 
 
 /~a*~~x z 
 3. The curve whose equation is y = xA/ - ^ 
 
 has a multiple point at the origin, and is composed of two 
 pointed loops, one on the right and the other on the left 
 of the origin. 
 
SINGULAR POINTS OF CURVES. 73 
 
 4. The curve whose equation is y 2 = (x 2) (x 3) 2 v 
 symmetrical with respect to the axis of x and consists of a 
 looped branch which extends from x = 2 to x = 3 ; at the 
 latter point the upper part passes below the axis of x and 
 lower part passes above that axis, forming a multiple point ; 
 beyond x = 3 the two parts continually diverge, extending 
 
 tO X CO . 
 
 Conjugate Points. 
 
 46. A CONJUGATE, or ISOLATED POINT, is a point whose 
 co-ordinates satisfy the equation of a curve, but which has 
 no consecutive point. Because it has no consecutive point, 
 the value of the first differential coefficient of y at it, is 
 imaginary. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Take the curve whose equation is y = x V% a. 
 
 In this case x and y = 0, satisfy the equation, but 
 no other value of x less than a gives a point of the curve. 
 Furthermore, we have, 
 
 dy_ _ 1 3x* - 2ax 
 dx~ 2 vz 3 ax 2 ' 
 
 which for x = is imaginary, as also for all values of 
 x < a. 
 
 2. Take the curve whose equation is 
 
 y = ax 2 zl 
 
 For every positive value of x, there are two values of y, 
 and consequently two points, except when cosx = 1, when 
 the two points reduce to one. These points constitute a 
 series of loops like the links of a chain, having for a dia- 
 
 4 
 
74 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 metral curve a parabola whose equation is y = ax 2 . For 
 every negative value of x the values of y are imaginary, 
 except when cosz = 1 ; in these cases we have a series of 
 isolated points situated on the diametral curve, whose 
 equation is y ax 2 . We have, by differentiating and 
 reducing, 
 
 dx 
 
 which is imaginary for negative values of x. 
 
 . IV. MAXIMA AND MINIMA. 
 
 Definitions of Maximum and Minimum. 
 
 47. A function of one variable is at a maximum state, 
 when it is greater than 
 the states that im- 
 mediately precede and 
 follow it; it is at a 
 minim urn state, when 
 it is less than the states 
 that immediately pre- 
 cede and follow it. 
 Thus, if KL be the 
 curve of the function, 
 BN will be a maxi- 
 mum, because it is 
 greater than AM and 
 (70, and EQ will be 
 a minimum, because it 
 is loss than DP and 
 FR. 
 
 1 
 
 [ S *" 
 
 M 
 
 / 
 
 \0 
 
 VI 
 
 
 ^^/ 
 
 
 
 x 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 L, 
 
 
 
 
 ) ABC DBF 
 
 Fig. 10. 
 
MAXIMA AND MINIMA. 75 
 
 Analytical Characteristics of a Maximum or Minimum. 
 
 48. If we examine the figures given in the last article, 
 we see that the slope of the curve KL, or the differential 
 coefficient of the function, changes from + to in pass- 
 ing a maximum, and from to + in passing a minimum. 
 But a varying quantity can only change sign by passing 
 through 0, or oo ; hence, the first differential coefficient 
 of the function must be either 0, or oo, at either maximum 
 or minimum state. 
 
 If, therefore, we find the first differential coefficient of the 
 function, and set it equal to and oo, we shall have two equa- 
 tions which will give all the values of the variable that belong 
 to either a maximum or minimum state of the function. 
 
 They may also give other values ; hence the necessity 
 of testing each root separately. This" may be done by the 
 following rule : 
 
 Subtract from, and add to, the root to be tested, an infi- 
 nitely small quantity; substitute these successively in the 
 first differential coefficient ; if the first result is plus and 
 the second minus, the root corresponds to a maximum ; if 
 the first is minus and the second plus, it corresponds to a 
 minimum; if both hare the same sign, it corresponds to 
 neither a maximum nor a minimum. 
 
 The maximum or minimum value may be found by sub- 
 stituting the corresponding root in the given function. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Let y- 3 + (x-2) 2 - 
 
 By the rule, we have, ^ = 2(x 2) = 0, :. x 2. 
 Substituting for x the values, 2 dx, and 2 + dx, we find 
 
DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 for the corresponding values of the differential coefficient 
 2dx, and + 2dx ; hence, x = 2, corresponds to a mini- 
 mum, which is y = 3, 
 
 2. Let y = 4 - (x - 3)f 
 We have, 
 
 For x = 3 ofe, and 3 -f do;, we have the differential coef- 
 ficient equal to 
 
 _J2 , _ _2_ 
 
 a * 
 
 hence, x 3 corresponds to a maximum, y = 4. 
 
 3. Let*/ = 3 + 2(z-l) 3 - 
 We have, 
 
 Substituting 1 dx, and 1 + dx, for re, in the first differ- 
 ential coefficient, we have in both cases a positive result; 
 hence, x 1 does not correspond to either a maximum, or 
 minimum. 
 
 The preceding method is applicable in all cases ; but, 
 when the first differential coefficient of the function is 0, 
 as it is in most instances, there is an easier process for 
 testing the roots. In this case, the function being repre- 
 sented by the ordinate of a curve, the maximum and 
 minimum states correspond to points at which the tangent 
 is horizontal ; furthermore, the curve lies wholly above, or 
 wholly below, the tangent at the point of contact, that is, 
 the tangent does not cut the curve at that point; hence, 
 the contact is of an odd order, and consequently the first 
 of tit e successive differential coefficients of the function that 
 
MAXIMA AND MINIMA. 77 
 
 does not reduce to must be of an even order (Art. 34). 
 If this is negative, the curve bends downward after passing 
 the point of contact, and the root corresponds to a maxi- 
 mum, if positive the curve bends upward, and the root cor- 
 responds to a minimum (Art. 35). Hence the following 
 practical rule for finding the values of the variables that 
 correspond to maxima and minima: 
 
 Place the first differential coefficient of the function equal 
 to 0, and solve the resulting equation; substitute each root 
 in the successive differential coefficients of the function, 
 until one is found that does not reduce to ; if this is of 
 an even order and negative, the root corresponds to a maxi- 
 mum, if of an even order and positive, to a minimum; but 
 if of an odd order, it corresponds to neither maximum nor 
 minimum. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Let y = x z 3x + 2. 
 We have, 
 
 Also, 
 
 -2- -+2 
 
 fa* ' UcJ| 
 
 Hence, x = -, corresponds to a minimum state, which is, 
 
 The symbol [Taj 3 is use< * to denote wliat jr? hi-c 
 
 3 
 
 when the variable that enters it is made equal to '-. 
 
78 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 2. y = 4- (z-3) 4 . 
 
 we also find, 
 
 =-24. 
 
 Hence, [?/] 3 4, is a maximum. 
 
 In applying the above rule, a positive constant factor 
 may be suppressed at any stage of the process; for it is 
 obvious that such suppression can in no way alter the 
 value of the roots to be found, or the signs of the successive 
 differential coefficients. 
 
 3. Let y = 3z 3 9z 8 27z + 30. 
 
 Rejecting the factor, + 3, and denoting the result by u, we 
 have, 
 
 du - z -<u 2 o q\ o- 
 
 dx~ 
 
 Rejecting the factor, + 3, and denoting the resulting value 
 of the function by u' 9 we have, 
 
 = 4, and r- = 4. 
 Lax J 3 Lax i 
 
 The first corresponds to a minimum and the second to a 
 maximum. Substituting in the given function, we have, 
 for the maximum and minimum values, 
 
 y' = 45, and y" = 51. 
 When the first differential coefficient is composed of 
 
MAXIMA AND MINIMA. 79 
 
 \**'tobk> factors, the method of finding the corresponding 
 vaiues ol the second differential coefficient may be simpli- 
 fied as follows: let us have, 
 
 'iR - p x o . 
 
 5 = l x ^> 
 
 P and Q being- functions of x, and suppose that [P] a = 0. 
 3j the rule for differentiating, we have, 
 
 , 
 
 dx* ' dx 
 
 but because P Decomes when x = a, we have, 
 
 dxJa 
 
 Hence, find }lie differential coefficient of the factor that 
 reduces to 0, ?), tiUiirty it by the other factor, and substitute 
 the root in th , product. The result is the same as that 
 found by substituting the root in the second differential 
 coefficient. 
 
 4. Let # = (x - 3) z (x 2). 
 We have, 
 
 = 2(x - 3) (x - '2) -H (x - 3) 2 = (x - 3)(3a? - 7) = 0; 
 
 By the principle just demonstrated, 
 
 4 
 Hence, [y] 0, is a minimum, and [/].? = , is a 
 
 maxmum. 
 
SO DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 If y represents any function of x 9 and if u = y n , we 
 have, 
 
 ^_ ny n-\dy 
 dx ~ ny dx 
 
 If x = a reduces ~ to 0, but does not reduce y n ~* to U. 
 dx 
 
 we have, from what precedes, 
 
 If n is positive, any value that makes y a maximum, or 
 minimum, "also makes u a maximum, or minimum ; if w 
 is negative, any value that makes y a maximum, or i{m- 
 ?w?/m, makes w a minimum, or maximum. The converse 
 
 is also true, if we except the values that make y n ~^ equal 
 to 0. Hence, if care be taken to reject the exceptional 
 values, we may throw off a radical sign in seeking for a 
 maximum or minimum. 
 
 5. Let y = 
 
 Throwing off the radical sign, suppressing the fact ', 
 + 2, and denoting the result by u, we have, 
 
 The value, x = 0, makes y = 0, and is to be rejected. 
 The value x = -fa makes -^ 2 negative, an 1 gives 
 
 y = '-:=,& maximum. 
 3 A/3 
 
MAXIMA AND MINIMA. 81 
 
 In like manner, if we have u ly, we have. 
 
 du 1 dy , . rdy^\ 
 
 -j- = . ~, and if -r ~ > we nave > as before, 
 
 dx y dx LdxJ a 
 
 rd 2 u-\ _ r 1 d*y~\ 
 Ldx*\ a ~ Ly ' dx 2 ^' 
 
 Hence, we infer, as before, that we may, with proper pre- 
 caution, treat the logarithm of a function instead of the 
 function itself, and the reverse. 
 
 x 2 3x + 2 (x i\( x 2) 
 
 6. Let y = ^^~^, or y = ^^^j. 
 
 Passing to logarithms, and denoting ly by u, we have. 
 
 u = l(x - 1) + l(x -2)- l(x + 1) - l(x + 2). 
 Whence, 
 
 ___ 
 dx x - 1 x 2 x + 1 x + 2 
 
 6(x* - 2) 
 
 = ; A -^>: 
 
 Both values of x make y negative. The first makes 
 
 dPu 
 
 -T-J negative, and the second makes it positive. Hence we 
 
 have, y = 12\/2 17, minimum, and y = 12\/2 17, 
 maximum. 
 
 PROBLEMS IN MAXIMA AND MINIMA. 
 
 1. Divide 21 into two parts, such that the less multiplied 
 by the square of the greater, shall be a maximum. 
 
 Solution. Let x he the greater, and 21 x the less. We 
 4* 
 
8* DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 have, for the equation of the problem, y (21 x)x 2 . 
 By the rule we find that x 14 makes y a maximum, 
 Hence, the parts are 14 and 7. 
 
 2. Find a cylinder whose total surface is equal to S, and 
 whose volume is a maximum. 
 
 Solution. Denote the radius of the baee by x, the alti- 
 tude by y, and the volume by V. From the geometrical 
 relations of the parts, we have, 
 
 S = 2x z + 2*x X y, and V vx 2 X y. 
 Combining, we have, for the equation of the problem, 
 
 , 
 
 V= x z - - - = - (Sx - 
 
 2ifx 2 ^ 
 
 /~fi /~S 
 
 V is a maximum when x A / ; whence, y = 2 A / ~, 
 
 I/ 6tf I/ or 
 
 or y 2x. That is, the altitude is equal to twice the 
 radius of the base. 
 
 3. Find the maximum rectangle that can be inscribed 
 in an acute-angled triangle whose base is 14 feet, and alti- 
 tude 10 feet. 
 
 Ans. The base is 7 feet, and the altitude 5 feet. 
 
 4. Find the maximum triangle that can be constructed 
 on a given base, and having a given perimeter. 
 
 Solution. Denote the base by 5, a second side by x, the 
 third side by %p b x, the perimeter by 2p, and the 
 area by A. From the formula for the area in terms of 
 the three sides, we find the equation of the problem, 
 
 A = Vp(p - b) (p x)(b+x -p). 
 
 For x = p JZ>, A is a maximum. Hence, the triangle is 
 isosceles. 
 
MAXIMA AND MINIMA. 83 
 
 5. To find the maximum isosceles triangle that can be 
 inscribed in a circle. 
 
 Ans. An equilateral triangle. 
 
 6. To find the minimum isosceles triangle that can be 
 circumscribed about a circle. 
 
 Ans. An equilateral triangle. 
 
 7. To find the maximum cone that can be cut from a 
 sphere whose radius is r. 
 
 Ans. The radius of the base is ^ , and the altitude is -r. 
 
 o o 
 
 8. To find the maximum cylinder that can be cut from 
 a cone whose altitude is h, and the radius of whose base 
 
 is r. 
 
 2 1 
 
 Ans. The radius of its base is -r, and its altitude -Ji. 
 
 o o 
 
 9. To find the altitude of the maximum cylinder that 
 
 can be cut from a sphere whose radius is r. 
 
 o 
 
 Ans. Altitude = 
 
 10. To find the maximum rectangle that can be inscribed 
 in an ellipse whose semi-axes are a and b. 
 
 Ans. The base is a\/2, and the altitude 
 
 11. To find the maximum segment of a parabola that 
 can be cut from a right cone whose altitude is h, and the 
 
 radius of whose base is r. 
 
 g __ 
 Ans. The axis is equal to -V^ 2 + ?'* 
 
 12. To find the maximum parabola that can be inscribed 
 in a given isosceles triangle. 
 
 q 
 
 Ans. The axis is equal to - tbB the altitude. 
 
84 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 13. To find the maximum cone whose surface is c\ a- 
 
 stant, and equal to S. 
 
 1 /S 
 Ans. The radius of the base is ^y 
 
 14. To find the maximum cylinder that can be cut from 
 & given oblate spheroid, whose semi-axes are a and b. 
 
 Ans. The radius of the base = a\ ,5, 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 and the altitude = 
 
 15. From the corners of a rectangle whose sides are a 
 and b f four squares are cut and the edges turned up to form 
 a rectangular box. Required the side of each square when 
 the box holds a maximum quantity. 
 
 a + b 1 
 
 . - a 7 o 
 
 Ans. TT -zVa* ab + b 2 , 
 
 o o 
 
 16. To find the minimum parabola that will circum- 
 scribe a given circle. 
 
 Solution. Let x and y be the co-ordinates of the point 
 of contact, a and b the terminal co-ordinates, 2p the vary- 
 ing parameter, and r the radius of the circle. For any 
 circumscribed parabola, we have, 
 
 a = x + p + r, and b = v2pa = v%p(x + p + r) ..... (1) 
 
 But from the triar.gle, whose sides are the radius, the sub- 
 normal, and the ordinate of the point of contact, we have, 
 
 and b =p + r ..... (2) 
 
 It will be shown hereafter that the area of a parabola is 
 two-thirds the rectangle having the same base and altitude, 
 
MAXIMA AND MINIMA. 85 
 
 Assuming this property, and denoting the area by A, we 
 have, for the equation of the problem, 
 
 Applying the rule, and remembering that p and A are 
 variable, we find that A is a minimum when %p = **. 
 
 17. Find the maximum difference between the sine and 
 
 versed-sine of a varying angle. 
 
 Ans. When the arc is 45. 
 
 18. Find the maximum value of y in the equation 
 
 y = -*>. 
 
 Ans. y' e*. 
 
 19. Divide the number 36 into two factors such that the 
 sum of their squares shall be a minimum. 
 
 Ans. Each factor is equal to G. 
 
 20. Divide a number m into such a number of equal 
 parts that their continued product shall be a maximum. 
 
 Tfl 
 
 Solution. Let x denote the number of parts, - - one 
 
 x 
 
 part, and ( J the continued product; hence, the equation 
 of the problem is, 
 
 fm\ x ,m 
 
 y = ( 1 ; or, ly = xl = xim xlx. 
 \x / x 
 
 m & 
 
 .'. x = , and y e 
 
86 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 m m 
 
 ~e e . ~e 
 
 3 X ', .* y == ^ , 
 
 m 9 
 
 is a maximum. 
 
 .21. What value of x will make the expression , 
 
 1 + tana: 
 
 & maximum? 
 
 Ans. x = 45. 
 
 22. Find the fraction that exceeds its square by the 
 greatest possible quantity. 
 
 Ans. \. 
 
 23. The illuminating power of a ray of light falling 
 obliquely on a plane varies inversely as the square of the 
 distance from the source, and directly as the sine of its 
 inclination to the plane. 
 
 How far above the centre of a horizontal circle must a 
 light be placed that the illumination of the circumference 
 
 may be a maximum ? r 
 
 Ans. H -. 
 
 ~V2 
 
 Maxima and Minima of a Function of Two Variables, 
 49. A function of two variables is at its maximum state 
 when it is greater, and at its minimum state when it is less 
 than all its consecutive states. 
 
 If two parallel sections (Art. 23) be taken through a maxi- 
 mum or minimum ordinate of a surface, the ordinate will be a 
 maximum or minimum in each section, and in nearly 
 every practical case the reverse will hold true. The ex- 
 ceptional cases will be those in which the maximum or 
 minimum ordinate corresponds to a singular point of the 
 surface. Omitting these, the problem is reduced to find- 
 Ag an ordinate that shall be a maximum, or a minimum 
 
MAXIMA AXD MINIMA. 87 
 
 ir both the parallel sections through it This requires 
 
 that and -7- be simultaneously equal to 0. The equa- 
 dy dx 
 
 tions thus obtained will determine all the values of x and 
 y that correspond to maxima or minima states, and each 
 set of such values may be tested in the manner explained 
 in the last article, observing that for the section parallel 
 to the plane xz, the successive differential coefficients of z, 
 are found by supposing y constant, and for the section 
 parallel to yz, they are found by supposing x constant. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Let z = x s 3xy + y*. 
 We have, 
 
 ^ = 3x* - 3y = 0, and -^ = 3y 2 - 3x = 0; 
 ctzc if 
 
 .: x = 0, y = 0; and x = 1, y 1. 
 Also, 
 
 d*z ,. d*z , . d*z a d*z 
 G% = b ; and -y-r = 6y, -=-= = 6. 
 dx z dx z dy z dy 3 
 
 The first set of values reduce the second differential 
 coefficients to 0, but not the third differential coefficients ; 
 hence, they are to be rejected. The second set of values 
 make both of the second differential coefficients positive; 
 hence, they correspond to a minimum, which is z = 1. 
 
 2. Let z = 
 
 Ill 
 For, a; = -, y = -, z = , a maximum. 
 
 3. Let z = Vp(p x)(p y}(x -f y p). 
 Dropping the radical sign, passing to logarithms, and 
 denoting the logarithm of z 2 by u, we have, 
 
 u = l(p) + l(p -x) + l(p - y} + l(x + y - p). 
 
88 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Hence, 
 
 du 1 
 
 dx p x x + yp 
 du_ 1 
 
 dy p y x -^- y p 
 
 2 2 
 
 x 3 p, y = 5 j9, make z a maximum. 
 o o 
 
 V. SINGULAR VALUES OF FUNCTIONS. 
 
 Definition and Method of Evaluation. 
 
 50. A singular value of a function is one that appears 
 under an indeterminate form, for a particular value of the 
 
 variable. Thus, the expression -- - reduces to -, for 
 
 x z 
 
 the particular value, x 0, whereas its real value is -. 
 
 Singular values that take the above form of indeter- 
 mination, may often be detected, and their real value 
 
 found by means of the calculus. Let u = -, in which 2 
 
 y 
 
 and y are functions of x that reduce to for x a. Clear- 
 ing of fractions and differentiating, we have, 
 
 udy + y du dz ; 
 if we make x a, the second term disappears, and we have, 
 
 If both dz and dy reduce to for x = a, we have, in like 
 manner, 
 
 and so on. Hence, the following rule: 
 
SINGULAR VALUES OF FUNCTIONS. 89 
 
 Divide tlie successive differentials of the numerator ly the 
 corresponding differentials of the denominator; substitute 
 the particular value of the variable in the resulting fraction, 
 continuing the operation till one is reached that is not inde- 
 terminate; the value thus found is the value required. 
 
 Thus, in the example above, we have, 
 
 tx sinari rl cosan _ rsinari _ rcosari _ 1 
 S JO ~~ L 3x* Jo . L~6^ Jo ~~ L~6~Jo "" 6* 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Find the value of | -- z -J . Ans. "4. 
 
 %. Find the value of [ 4 _ ^ ~ ^ -^] . Ans. g. 
 
 p#3 (i%x OX^ -f- Ct>^~\ 
 
 3. Find the value of '= . Ans. 0. 
 
 L x a -Jo, 
 
 rl x n ~\ 
 
 4. Find the value of - . Ans. n. 
 
 \ J. X J 1 
 
 re x e~ x ~\ 
 
 5. Find the value of ^7- ^- . Ans. 2. 
 
 L/(J + x) JO 
 
 6. Find the value of f" 1 ~ cos _5] . Ans. 0. 
 
 L i?/ JO 
 
 7. Find the value of 
 
 8. Find the value of jjrZj An *- 
 
DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 9. Find the value of - Ans. - , 
 
 l -f tanaJtf 4 
 
 10. Find the value of [~-JjL ^~\ . Ans. 2. 
 
 L - * - z -* a 
 
 Singular values that appear under the forms X <*>, 
 , and GO oo , can be reduced to the form discussed, and 
 
 then treated by the rule. The method of proceeding in 
 each case will be illustrated by an example. 
 
 11. The expression (1 x) tan ~ 9 which reduces to x oo , 
 
 M 
 
 1 _ % 
 
 when x = 1, can be placed under the form , which, 
 
 2 
 by the rule, reduces to - for the particular value, x = L 
 
 f ~ r/ 
 
 12. The expression, tan-^- ~ j= -- , which reduces to 
 * ( x ~~ 1) 
 
 for x = 1, can be placed under the form - , and 
 
 . 
 this, by the rule, gives for x = 1, the value -- . 
 
 13. The expression, ztanz - sec.r, which reduces to 
 
 /c 
 
 if crsinz i r 
 
 & oo , for the value x = -, may be written - -=-, 
 
 2 cosx 
 
 which, by the rule, gives for x = -^, the value 1. 
 
 Al 
 
ELEMENTS OF GEOMETRICAL MAGNITUDES. 
 
 91 
 
 VI. ELEMENTS OF GEOMETRICAL MAGNITUDES. 
 
 Differentials of Lines, Surfaces, and Volumes. 
 
 51. Let AP and BQ be two consectVive ordimites of the 
 curve, IfL, whose equation is y =f(x)', then will PQ be 
 the differential of the length of the 
 curve, and APQB will be the dif- 
 ferential of the area, bounded by 
 the curve, the axis of x, and any 
 two ordinates; if we suppose the 
 figure to revolve about the axis of 
 x, the curve will generate a surface 
 of revolution, and the area between 
 the curve and axis will generate a 
 volume of revolution ; the surface generated by PQ, is the 
 differential of the surface of revolution, and the volume 
 generated by APBQ, is the differential of the volume of 
 revolution. When the equation of KL is given, the values 
 of these differentials may always be found in terms of x 
 and dx, or of y and dy. 
 
 1. Denote PQ by dL ; we shall have, as in Art. 5, 
 
 Fig. 11. 
 
 dL = 
 
 To apply this formula, we differential the equation ol 
 the cnrve, combine the resulting equation with that of the 
 curve, so as to find the differential of one variable in terms 
 of the other variable and its differential, and substitute 
 this in the formula. Thus, let it be required to find the 
 differential of the arc of a parabola. Assuming the equa- 
 tion of tLc parabola, y z = Zpx, we find, by differentiation 
 and combination, 
 
DIFFEKENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 dy = faA/jfr and dx = H-dy, or dy 9 = 
 
 and dx* = dy 2 . 
 p* 
 
 Substituting, and reducing, we have, 
 dL = 
 
 xJ. Denote APQB by dA ; this is made up of two parts, 
 
 the rectangle, AR = ydx, and the triangle, RPQ = -dydx; 
 
 & 
 
 but the latter is an infinitesimal of the second order, it may 
 be therefore neglected in comparison with the former; 
 hence, we have, 
 
 dA=ydx ..... (2) 
 
 This formula may be applied in a manner similar to that 
 just explained. Thus, if it be required to find the differ- 
 ential of the area of a parabola, we have, 
 
 _ 
 
 dA = dy ; or, dA = (v%px)dx. 
 
 3. Denote the surface generated by PQ by dS ; this 
 surface is that of a frustum of a cone, in which the radius 
 of the upper base is y, the radius of the lower base, y + dy y 
 and the slant height, ydx 2 + dy*. Hence, 
 
 dS = [%y + 2<V + dy)] X Vdx z + dy*. 
 
 Neglecting dy in comparison with y, and reducing, we 
 have, 
 
 dS = 2y\/dx* + dy* (3) 
 
APPLICATION TO' POLAR CO-ORDINATES. 
 
 93 
 
 To find the differential of a paraboloid, we proceed as 
 before. Substituting the values already found, and re- 
 ducing, we have, 
 
 dS = 
 
 P 2 ', or, dS = 
 
 4. Denote the volume generated by APQB, by dV ; 
 this volume is that of a frustum of a cone, in which the 
 radius of the upper base is y, of the lower base, y + dy^ 
 and the altitude dx. Hence, 
 
 neglecting dy in comparison with y, we have, 
 dV=y*dx ..... (4) 
 
 Applying the formula to the paraboloid of revolution, we 
 have, as before, 
 
 z/ 3 
 3V = * dy, or, d V = Zepxdx. 
 
 VII. APPLICATION TO POLAR CO-ORDINATES. 
 
 General Notions, and Definitions. 
 
 52. In a polar system, the 
 radius vector is usually taken 
 as the function, the angle be- 
 ing the independent variable. 
 Let P be any point of the 
 curve, PL, in the plane of 
 the axes, OX, OY ; let 
 be the pole, and OX the ini- 
 tial line, of a system of polar 
 co-ordinates. Then will OP, Fig. 12. 
 
 YD X 
 
94 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 denoted by r, and XOP, denoted by <p, be the polar co- 
 ordinates of P, and the equation of PL may be written 
 under the form, 
 
 r = 
 
 It will be convenient to express the values of 9 in terms 
 of it as a unit ; in this case, it is laid off on the directing 
 circle, GS, in the direction of the arrow when positive, and 
 in a- contrary direction when negative. Let GH be "the 
 measure of <p for the point P, and let HI be equal to the 
 constant infinitesimal, dq> ; draw OIQ, and with as a 
 centre describe the arc, PR ; then will OP and OQ be 
 consecutive radius vectors, P and Q will bo consecutive 
 points, RQ will be the differential of r, PQ will be the 
 differential of the arc, POQ will be the differential of the 
 area swept over by the radius vector, and PQ prolonged, 
 will be tangent to the curve at P. 
 
 The line, BC, perpendicular to the radius vector, OP, is 
 the movable axis, and the perpendicular distance, OA, is the 
 polar distance of the tangent. Prolong the tangent to meet 
 the movable axis at B ; at P draw a normal, and produce 
 it to meet the movable axis at G ; then is OB the subtan- 
 gent, PB the tangent, 00 the subnormal, and PC tht; 
 normal at the point P. 
 
 Useful Formulas. 
 
 53. 1. Differential of the arc. Denote the differential 
 of the arc, PQ, by dL ; RP being infinitesimal may be re- 
 garded as a straight line perpendicular to OQ ; it is equal 
 to rdv ; hence, 
 
 dL = Vdr* + r*d$* (1) 
 
APPLICATION TO POLAR CO-ORDINATES. 95 
 
 2. Differential of the area. Denote the differential of 
 the area swept over by the radius vector by dA ; this is 
 made up of the sector, OPR, and the triangle, RPQ ; 
 but, RPQ is an infinitesimal of the second order, and the 
 sector is an infinitesimal of the first order ; neglecting the 
 former in comparison with the latter, and remembering that 
 the area of a sector is equal to half the product of its arc 
 and radius, we have, 
 
 dA = ir'dp ..... (2) 
 
 3. Angle letween the radius vector and tangent. Denote 
 the required angle by V; the angle, RQP, differs from the 
 required angle, OPB, by an infinitesimal, and may, there- 
 fore, be taken for it; but tan RQP, equals RP, divided by 
 RQ ; hence, we have, 
 
 = ..... (3) 
 dr 
 
 4. Polar distance of the tangent. Denote the distance 
 OA by p; the triangles, QPR and QOA, are similar: 
 hence, 
 
 QP : RP : : QO : OA. 
 
 But, PO differs from QO by an infinitesimal, and may, 
 therefore, be taken for it; making this change, and sub- 
 stituting for the quantities their values, we have, 
 
 + r$ : ry \\r\p; 
 hence, 
 
 = _M* 
 
9(5 
 
 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 5. Formula /or subtangenl. Denote the snbtangent by 
 S.T; in the triangle, POB, the perpendicular, OB, is 
 equal to the base, OP, multiplied by the tangent of the 
 angle at the base; hence, 
 
 S.T = 
 
 dr 
 
 (5) 
 
 G. Formula for subnormal. Denote the subnormal by 
 S.N; the triangles, OPB and OOP, are similar; hence, 
 tznOCP = t'diiOPB; but, OC, equals OP, divided by 
 hence, 
 
 7. Formula for the radius of curvature. Denote the 
 radius of curvature by p; let P and Q be two consecutive 
 points of the curve, KL, and let 
 PC and QC be normals at these 
 points, meeting at C ; then will 
 C be the centre of the oscillatory 
 circle ; draw OM perpendicular 
 to PC, it will be parallel to the 
 tangent at P, and, consequently, 
 the intercept, PM, will be equal 
 to the polar distance of the tan- 
 gent denoted by p ; draw C, 
 OP, and Q. From the figure, we have, 
 
 (7 2 = r z f p 2 - 2p P . 
 
 If we pass from P to Q, r will become r + dr, p will 
 become p + dp, and OC and p will remain unchanged. 
 If, therefore, we differentiate the preceding equation under 
 the supposition that r and p are variable, the resulting 
 
 Fig. 13. 
 
APPLICATION TO EOLAR CO-ORDINATES. 07 
 
 equation will express a relation between p, r, and/*. Dif- 
 ferentiating, \ve have, 
 
 TflT 
 
 0; .: f = - ..... (7) 
 
 8. Formula for the chord of curvature. The chord ol 
 curvature is the chord of the oscillatory circle that passes 
 through the pole and the point of osculation. Denote it 
 by C ' ; prolong PC and PO till they meet the circle at R 
 and N, and draw RN. The right angled triangles, PNR 
 and PMO, are similar, hence, 
 
 PN : PR : : PM : PO, 
 or, 
 
 nence 
 
 C: 2 P up : r; 
 
 =, or t'=8p ..... (8) 
 r dp 
 
 Spirals. 
 
 54. If a straight line revolve uniformly about one of its 
 points as a centre, and if, at the same time, a second point 
 travel along the line, in accordance with any law, the lat- 
 ter point will describe a spiral. The part described in one 
 revolution of the straight line is a spire. The fixed point 
 is the pole. If we denote the distance from the pole to the 
 generating point by r, and the corresponding angle, 
 counted from the initial line, by 9, we have, for the gen- 
 eral equation of spirals, 
 
 r = /(?) (1) 
 
 When this relation is algebraic, the spiral is said to be 
 algebraic ; when this relation is transcendental, the spiral 
 is said to be transcendental. 
 
98 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Among algebraic spirals, the most important are the 
 spiral of Archimedes, the parabolic spiral, and the hyper- 
 bolic spiral, corresponding, respectively, to the right line, 
 the parabola, and the hyperbola. 
 
 Spiral of Archimedes. 
 55. The equation of this curve is, 
 
 r 09 ..... (2) 
 
 We see that the generating point is at the pole when 
 the variable angle is 0, and that the radius vector increases 
 uniformly with the variable angle, being always equal to o 
 times the arc of the directing circle that has been swept 
 over. Differentiating equation (2), we have, 
 
 dr = ady. 
 Substituting, in formulas (1) to (8), Art. 53, we find, 
 
 dL = acfyl + 9 2 ; S.T= a^ 
 dA = 4-aV*; S.N=a; 
 
 ~ 
 
 If we take a straight line, whose equation is y = ax, and 
 lay off the abscissa of any point on the directing circle, 
 and the ordinate of that point on the corresponding 
 radius vector, the point thus determined is a point of th<! 
 spiral of Archimedes. 
 
TRANSCENDENTAL CURVES. 99 
 
 In like manner, we may discuss and construct the para- 
 bolic spiral, whose equation is r 2 = 2p$, and the hyperbolic 
 spiral, whose equation is r$ m. The former corresponds 
 to the ordinary parabola, and the latter, to the ordinary 
 hyperbola referred to its asymptotes. 
 
 VIII. TRAXSCEXDENTAL CURVES. 
 
 Definition. 
 
 56. A transcendental curve, is a curve whose equation 
 can only be expressed by the aid of transcendental quanti- 
 ties. The cycloid, and the logarithmic curve are examples 
 of this class of lines. 
 
 The Cycloid. 
 
 57. The cycloid is a curve that may be generated by a 
 point in the circumference of a circle, when that circle 
 rolls along a straight line. The point is called the genera- 
 trix, the circle is called the generating circle, and the 
 straight line is the base of the cycloid. The curve has an 
 infinite number of branches, each corresponding to one 
 revolution of the generating circle. 
 
 To find the equation of one branch, A PM ; let A be tne 
 origin, the centre of the generating circle, and P the 
 place of the generatrix after the circle has rolled through 
 the angle KCP, denot- 
 ed by <p ; denote the co- 
 ordinates, AL and LP, 
 by x and ?/, and let the 
 radius of the generating AL 
 ci rcle be represen ted by r. Fig. 14. 
 
 From the figure, we have, 
 
 = AK- LK. 
 
100 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Bat, AK is equal to the arc /fP, and KP is the arc 
 whose versed sine is y, to the radius r, or r times the arc 
 
 7/ 
 
 whose versed sine is , to the radius 1 ; LK is equal to 
 
 P/>, which, from a property of the circle, is equal to 
 =t V(2r y)y, the upper sign corresponding to the case 
 in which P is to the left of KE, and the lower sign to the 
 case in which P is to the right of KE ; and AL is equal 
 to x. Substituting these values, and reducing, we have, 
 
 j nt 
 
 x = rversin" - 
 
 which is the equation sought. From it we see that y can 
 never be less than 0, nor greater than 2r; we see, also, that 
 y is equal to 0, for x = 0, and for x = 2<7rr, and that for 
 every value of y, there are two values of x, one exceeding 
 xr as much as the other falls short of it. 
 Differentiating and reducing, we have, 
 
 dx - 
 
 (Mi - 
 
 which is the differential equation of the cycloid. From it 
 we deduce the equation, 
 
 ~r ^ A/ -- 1> whence, -~ = -- -. 
 dx y y dx z y 2 
 
 From, the first, we see that the tangent to the curve is 
 vertical for x 0, and x = 2tfr, and that it is horizontal 
 for x = *r ; from the second, we see that the curve is always 
 concave downward. 
 
 Substituting, in formulas (6) and (7), Art. 32, we have. 
 
 =--===, and 
 
TRANSCENDENTAL CURVES. 
 
 101 
 
 The Logarithmic Curve. 
 
 58. The logarithmic curve, is a curve in which any 
 ordinate is equal to the logarithm of the corresponding 
 abscissa. Its equation is, therefore, 
 
 y logs, or y = M.lx; 
 
 in which M is the modulus of the 
 system. 
 
 If M > 0, y will be negative when 
 x < 1, positive when x > 1, when 
 x = 1, and infinite when x 0. 
 
 If M < 0, y will be positive when 
 x < 1, negative when x > 1, when x = 1, and infinite 
 when x = 0. 
 
 In no case can a negative value of -a? correspond to a 
 point of the curve. 
 
 Differentiating, we find, 
 
 Fig. 15. 
 
 ~i~ 
 
 dx 
 
 - 7 
 
 dx 2 
 
 The first expression has the same sign as M y and varies 
 inversely as x. Hence, when M> 0, the slope is positive, 
 when M < 0, the slope is negative, and in both cases tin- 
 curve continually approaches parallelism with the axis 
 of x. 
 
 The second expression has a sign contrary to that of M, 
 and varies inversely as the square of x. Hence, when M > 0, 
 the curve is concave downward, as KDC, and when M < 0, 
 it is concave upward, as KDW. 
 
PART III. 
 
 INTEGEAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Object of the Integral Calculus. 
 
 59. The object of the integral calculus is to pass from a 
 given differential to a function from which it may have 
 been derived. This function is called the integral of the 
 differential, and the operation of finding it is called inte- 
 gration. The operation of integration is indicated by this 
 
 sign, /, called the integral sign. Integration and differ 
 
 entiation are inverse operations, and their signs, when 
 
 placed before a quantity, neutralize each other; thus, 
 , % 
 
 dx = x. 
 
 A constant quantity connected with a function by the sign 
 of addition, or subtraction, disappears by differentiation, 
 hence, we must add a constant to the integral obtained; 
 and inasmuch as this constant may have any value, it is 
 said to be arbitrary. The integral, before the addition of 
 the constant, is called incomplete, after its addition it is 
 said to be complete. By means of the arbitrary constant, 
 as we shall see hereafter, the integral may be made to 
 satisfy any one reasonable condition. 
 
 Nature of an Integral. 
 
 60. The differential of a function is the difference 
 Ix'tweon two consecutive states of that function; hence, 
 
NATURE OF AN INTEGRAL. 103 
 
 any state of the function whatever, is equal to some pre- 
 vious, or initial state, plus the algebraic sum of all the 
 intermediate values of the differential. But this state is 
 the integral, by definition ; hence, if the arbitrary constant 
 represents the initial state, the incomplete integral repre- 
 sents the algebraic sum of all the differentials from the 
 initial state up to any state whatever, and the complete 
 integral represents the initial state, plus the algebraic sum 
 of all the differentials from that state up to any state 
 whatever. 
 
 Before any value has been assigned to the constant, the 
 integral is said to be indefinite ; when the value of the 
 constant has been determined, so as to satisfy a particular 
 hypothesis, the integral is said to ^particular ; and when 
 a definite value has been given to the variable, this integral 
 is said to be definite. 
 
 The values of the variable that correspond to the initial 
 and terminal states of a definite integral are called limits, 
 the former being the inferior, and the latter the superior 
 limit ; the integral is said to lie between these limits. The 
 value of tlip definite integral may be found from the indefi- 
 nite integral by substituting for the variable the inferior 
 and superior limits separately, and then taking the first 
 result from the second. The first result is the integral 
 from any state up to the first limit, and the second is the 
 integral from the same state up to the last limit; hence, 
 the difference is the integral between the limits. The 
 
 C b ' T,' i, 
 symbol for integrating between the limits is I > m wnicn a 
 
 is the inferior, and I the superior limit. 
 
 This article will be better understood when we come to 
 its practical application in Articles 78 and following. 
 
104 LNTEGKAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Methods of Integration 5 Simplifications. 
 
 61. The methods of integration are not founded on pro- 
 cesses of direct reasoning, but are mostly dependent on 
 formulas. The more elementary formulas are deduced by 
 reversing corresponding formulas in the differential ,cal- 
 culus; the more complex ones are deduced from these by 
 various transformations and devices, whereby the expres- 
 sions to be integrated are brought under some known 
 integrable form. 
 
 It has been shown (Art. 9), that a constant factor re- 
 mains unchanged by differentiation; hence, a constant 
 factor may be placed without the sign of integration. It 
 was also shown in the same article, that the differential of 
 the sum of any number of functions is equal to the sum 
 of their differentials; hence, the integral of the sum of 
 any number of differentials is equal to the sum of theii 
 integrals. These principles are of continued use in inte- 
 gration. 
 
 Fundamental Formulas. 
 
 62. If we differentiate the expression -, we have, 
 
 reversing the formula, and applying the integral sign to 
 both members, 
 
 Remembering that the signs of integration and lifferentia* 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 105 
 
 tion neutralize each other (Art. 50), and adding a constant 
 to complete the integral, we have, 
 
 [1] 
 
 Hence, to integrate a monomial differential, drop the 
 differential of the variable, add 1 to the exponent of the 
 variable, divide the result ~by the new exponent, and add a 
 constant. 
 
 This rule fails when n = 1 ; for, if we apply it, we get 
 a result equal to oo ; in this case the integration may be 
 effected as follows : 
 
 From Art. 15, we have, 
 
 7/ 7 \ _ , 
 
 d(alx) = a = ax dx ; 
 x 
 
 reversing and proceeding as before, we have, 
 
 fax~ l dx = of = alx+C ..... [2] 
 From Art. 16, we have, 
 
 reversing and proceeding as before, we have, 
 
 
 L3J 
 
 In like manner, reversing the formulas in Article 17, let- 
 tered from a to li t we have, 
 
 I cosxdx smx + C ............ . [4] 
 
 5* 
 
106 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 I Biaxdx cosz + O .......... [5] 
 
 r_dx = ............ [6 j 
 
 J cos z x 
 
 -^L = cot* + (7 ........... [7] 
 
 sm 2 a; 
 
 I siuxdx = versing + .......... [8] 
 
 / cosa;^ = coversinz + C ....... [9] 
 
 Jt&nxsQcxdx = seai? + C ......... [10] 
 
 / cota;coseca;^ = cosecx + ..... [11 J 
 
 In like manner, from the formulas in Art. 18, lettered from 
 a' to h', we deduce the following: 
 
 r-M= = S ^- l y + G ........ [12] 
 
 JVl-y* 
 
 -^= = co S -V+<7 ....... [13] 
 
 [15] 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 107 
 
 / /=== = versiu~V + C ...... [161 
 
 J ^y _ y 2 
 
 /- . ___ = coversin~V + O . . . [17] 
 V2 - 2 
 
 (7 
 
 -- -p- - = cosec-V + C ---- [19J 
 
 V* - 1 
 
 If in formulas (12), (13), (14), (15), (18), (19), we make 
 
 Ix , , , 
 
 / = , whence dy = , and reduce, we hare, 
 
 d 
 
 v* 
 
 dx 1 . _ bx 
 
 /cfo 1 _ ifz 
 
 ^-^ = S5 ten +c 
 
 /__*= loot' 1 52+ (7. .[23] 
 / a 2 4- ^ 2 a 2 aJ a 
 
 = l sec -l^ + a., .[241 
 
 a* a 
 
108 INTEGKAL CALCULUS. 
 
 From (16) and (17), by substituting j- x for y, and re- 
 ducing, we have, 
 
 C 
 J 
 
 
 dx 
 
 = 1 versing* + C ..... [26J 
 * 
 
 1 . _i23 8 
 
 = T coversm x r- x + (7 . . [271 
 2 
 
 Formulas (1) to (19) are the elementary forms, to one 
 of which we endeavor to reduce every case of integration ; 
 the processes of the integral calculus are little else than a 
 succession of transformations and devices, by which this 
 reduction is affected. 
 
 In the following examples, and, as a general thing, 
 throughout the book, the incomplete integral is given, it 
 being understood that an arbitrary constant is to be added 
 in every case. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Formulas (1) to (3). 
 
 1. dy = tx* dx. Ans. y = -j-, 
 
 i 24 
 
 2. dy = :z*dx. Ans. y = -lx*. 
 
 3. dy = 3x~*cfa. An*, y = x , 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 10!) 
 
 4. dy = Zx^dx. Ans. y = ~x *. 
 
 2 -4 10 -i 
 
 5. dy = - x dx. Ans. y = -x . 
 
 e. = - - fo 
 
 8. dy = 
 
 A 
 
 9. r??y = 3x~<lx. Ans. y - Six. 
 
 f* K 
 
 .cosa? 
 
 11. dy = e Binx cosxdx. Ans. y = 
 
 12. dy e cosx sinxdx. Ans. y = 
 
 Formulas (4) to (11). 
 14. dy = - lsin(o; 2 ) X xdx. Ans. y = T cos(z 2 ). 
 
 & 
 
 ^ r\r\c* 2/1 nr* \ 
 
 . y = lcot(3.r). 
 
110 
 17. dy = &iu(ax)dx. 
 
 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Ans. y = versing). 
 
 18. dy cosf x 2 } X xdx. Ans. y coversinf x z Y 
 
 Formulas (12) to (19). 
 
 19. dy = . Ans. y = sin" 1 (2^). 
 
 20. dy = 
 
 Ans. y = sin i (x t ) 
 
 a&dx 
 
 IF vT 
 
 Ans. y = ^sin (x 
 
 o 
 
 22. J = 
 
 cfa; 
 
 xdx 
 
 Zdx 
 
 y = cos" 1 
 
 , 
 
 = tan 
 
 = 2cot 
 
 25. < = 
 
y 2 
 
 METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 
 
 Formulas (20) to (25). 
 ; (a = v2j "b = 3). 
 
 1H 
 
 27. rf = 
 
 ; (a = 
 
 Ans. y = -tan x ~. 
 
 = cot" 
 
 = - rrCOSCC 
 
112 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 32. dy - ?. Ans. y = 
 
 33. dy = . Ans. y = -cosec" 
 
 " /T^ n 9 . /- 
 
 V3 
 
 Formulas (26) and (27). 
 34. dy = = ; (a = 2, J = 3). 
 
 = versm 
 
 o 
 
 Zaxdx . , 
 
 85. cfr= _ -; (=i, a= 
 
 
 EXAMPLES IN SUCCESSIVE INTEGRATION. 
 
 36. 
 
 Dividing by dx 2 , 
 
 VT = axdx, or d( -~] = axdx. 
 dx 2 \dx z j 
 
 Integrating, we have, 
 
 d*y _ ax* 
 
 d& ~T 
 
 Multiplying by dx, and integrating again, we find, 
 dy ax 3 
 
 j. = _ + Cx+(7 . 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 113 
 
 Multiplying again by dx, and integrating, 
 
 37. d*>y = x~*d 
 As before, we have, 
 -3 
 
 <&-*- + ux + 
 
 and finally, 
 
 1, Cx* C'x 2 
 = -fa + -g- + -y- 
 
 38. 6? 3 y = mdx*. 
 
 mx* 
 
 
 
 Ox 
 o / 
 
 39. t? 3 y = x* dx 3 . 
 
 105 
 40. J 2 ?/ = sx*dx*. 
 
114 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Integration by Parts. 
 
 63. If u and v are functions of x, we have, from Art. 10, 
 
 d(uv) = udv + vdu. 
 Integrating and transposing, we have, 
 
 I udv = uv t vdu [28] 
 
 This is called the formula for integration by parts; it 
 enables us to integrate an expression of the form udv 
 whenever we can integrate an expression of the form vdu. 
 It is much used in reducing integrals to known forms. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. dy = xlx dx / 
 Let Ix = Uj and xdx = dv / 
 
 , dx , a* 
 /. du = , and v = -. 
 
 X A 
 
 Substituting in the formula, we have, 
 
 __ x 2 lx _ rxdx _ x*lx __ x 2 
 ~2 J ~2~ ~2 T' 
 
 
 ^ 2 = u, and - = dv; 
 
 , xdx 1 
 
 .". du -- - --- , and v = 
 
METHODS OP INTEGRATION. 115 
 
 hence, we have, from the formula, 
 
 Vl - x z r dx Vl-x* . 
 y = / = sm" 1 ^. 
 
 X J A /i _ 3.8 iC 
 
 Additional Formulas. 
 
 64. 1. Formula (1) may be extended to cover the case 
 of a binomial differential of the form, 
 
 in which the exponent of the variable without the paren- 
 thesis is 1 less than the exponent of the variable within. 
 
 Let a + bx n = z; .-. bnx n ~ l dx = dz, or x n ~ l dx = ^. 
 
 bn 
 
 Substituting, and integrating, we have, 
 
 y = 
 Keplacing z by its equal, (a + &s n ), we have, 
 
 J '(. + fc^^i* = 1 + a 
 
 Hence, to integrate a binomial differential of the proposed 
 form, add 1 to the exponent of the parenthesis, divide the 
 result by the new exponent into the product of the coefficient 
 and the exponent of the variable within the parenthesis. 
 
 It is to be observed that a constant factor may be set 
 aside during the process of integration, and then intro- 
 duced, as explained in Article Gl. 
 
116 
 
 CALCULUS. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 * 
 
 1. dy = (1 + x*)*xdx. 
 
 xdx 
 
 2. dv 
 
 4. dy (2 
 
 5. dy = - 
 
 Ans. y = 
 
 Ans. y = 
 
 Ans. y = (7 
 
 lo 
 
 . ;y = (2 
 
 2. The preceding formula fails when p = 1 ; in that 
 case, we have, 
 
 . 
 
 bnJ z In 
 
 Replacing z by its value, 
 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 [30 1 
 
 1. dy = 3(3 -f 
 
 *fc 
 
 2. r/?x = 
 
 Ans. -= 
 
 re + a 
 
 7 
 3. r = 
 
 . 
 
 x + 4 
 
 . y = l(x + a), 
 Ans. y = 2 7a + 41 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 11? 
 
 When the differential expression is a fraction in which 
 the numerator is equal to the differential of the denomi- 
 nator multiplied by a constant, its integral is equal to that 
 constant into the Napierian logarithm of the denominator. 
 
 4. dy = ^Ar Ans ' V = " 3 l ( a * ~ x ^' 
 
 3x2 
 
 Ans. y = l(x* + x 2 + x -f 1) 
 3. Let it be required to integrate the expression. 
 
 dx 
 
 \/x 2 dc. a 2 
 assume, 
 
 x z =t a z = z 2 , whence, xdx = zdz ; 
 
 adding zdx to both members and factoring, we have, 
 
 (x + z} dx = z(dx -f dz) ; 
 hence, 
 
 dx _ dx _ dx 4- dz _ d(x -\- z) > 
 
 applying the principle just deduced, we have, 
 
 Replacing z by its value, we have, finally, 
 
 /* ^ = i( x + V^io 5 ) + C [31] 
 
 J \/x 2 a 2 
 
118 
 
 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 // - - 
 
 7 ~ 
 
 - 5 
 
 4. Let it be required to integrate the expression, 
 
 dx 
 
 since, dx = d(a + #), and 2aa; + a; 2 = (a -f ^) 2 a*, 
 we have, 
 
 /(fa _ / d(a + x) 
 V^ctx + x*J >\/a +~z z a? 
 
 which can be integrated by Formula (31); hence, 
 
 /^= =l\a 
 V'2ax + x 2 ( 
 
 ... [32J 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 dx 
 
 X 
 
 Ans. y = l(x + - + -v/|F+7 5 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION-. 119 
 
 Vbx + 9z 2 
 5. Let it be required to integrate the expression, 
 
 dx 
 
 dy = -- -: 
 a z x 9 
 
 Factoring, we have, 
 
 dx 1 j dx dx ) 
 
 a 2 x* ~2a( a + x + a x \ ' 
 
 Integrating, we have, 
 
 But the difference of the logarithms of two quantities is 
 equal to the logarithm of their quotient; hence, 
 
 /V^- i = lj +0 . .[33| 
 J a* x z 2a a x 
 
 and in like manner, 
 
 ..... [34| 
 
 a x + a 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 dx 1 , 3 -f x 
 
 dx 1 x 2 
 
120 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 d z y 
 S. Given -j-^ = y, to find the relation between y and x. 
 
 Multiplying both members by 
 
 Integrating, 
 
 dt/ 2 dii 
 
 ' ' 
 
 T? - y 
 
 dx* 
 Integrating by Formula 31, 
 
 x = 
 
 d z s 
 4. Given -j-^ = n z s, to find tlie relation between a 
 
 and t, t being the independent variable. 
 Multiplying by 2ds, 
 
 dP 
 
 In tegrating, 
 
 ^s_ 22 ds 
 
 dt^~ ~ V0 -*' 
 
 Integrating by Formula (20), 
 
 , 1 . _i ns ~. 
 
 t = - sin L ^ + C'. 
 n 
 
 Rational and Entire Differentials. 
 
 65. An algebraic function is rational and entire when it 
 contains no radical or fractional part that involves the 
 variable. If the indicated operations be performed, every 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 121 
 
 rational and entire differential will be reduced to the form 
 of a monomial, or polynomial differential, each term of 
 which can be integrated by formulas (1) or (2). Thus, 
 if the indicated operations be performed, in the expression, 
 
 we have, 
 
 dy = If 8x - x* + 6z* - 3z 3 \dx. 
 
 Hence, by integration, 
 
 2 6 . 3 . 
 
 = * X + X ~ X 
 
 
 In like manner, any rational and entire differential may 
 
 be integrated. 
 
 Rational Fractions. 
 
 66. A rational fraction, is a fraction whose terms are 
 rational and entire. When a rational fraction is the differ- 
 ential of a function, and its numerator is of a higher degree 
 than its denominator, it may, by the process of division, be 
 separated into two differentials, one of which is rational 
 and entire and the other a rational fraction, in which the 
 numerator is of a lower degree than the denominator. The 
 former maybe integrated as in the last article; it remains 
 to be shown that the latter can be integrated whenever 
 the denominator can be resolved into binomial factors of 
 
 the first degree with respect to the variable. The method 
 
 G 
 
122 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 of integration consists in resolving the differential coeffi- 
 cients into partial fractions, by some of the known methods, 
 then multiplying each by the differential of the variable 
 and integrating the polynomial result. There are four 
 cases, depending on the method of resolving the differen- 
 tial coefficient into partial fractions. Each case will be 
 illustrated by examples. 
 
 First Case. When the binomial factors of the denomi- 
 nator are unequal. 
 
 Let us have, 
 
 .. \ dCC *~~" ) CCCC &Q5 ~~~ 
 
 ay = = r-j ; -, dx. 
 
 Assume the identical equation, 
 
 2x-5 = A t B . V 
 
 ( x - i) ( x _ 2) (x - 3) ~~ x - 1 x - 2 x-3 ' 
 
 Clearing of fractions. 
 2a? 5 = A(x -2) (x 3) + B(x 1) (x - 3) 
 
 + C(x - 1) (x - 2) (2) 
 
 In order to find A, B, and 0, we might perform the 
 operations indicated in (2), equate the coefficients of the 
 like powers of x, and solve the resulting equations; but 
 there is a simpler method in cases like this, depending on 
 the fact that (2) is true for all values of x. 
 
 
 
 Making x = 1, we find, 3 = 2.4; 
 
 Making x = 2, we find, 1 = B; .-. B = 1. 
 
 Making x = 3, we find, 1 = 2(7; /. C 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 
 
 Substituting these in (1), multiplying by dx, and in 
 
 tegrating by Formula 30, we have, 
 
 
 
 (2x - 5)<fa _3 f dx f dx 
 
 jc -l)(x- 2) (x - 3) ~~ %Jz>-l Jx-% 
 
 Reducing the result to its simplest form, in accordance 
 with the elementary principles of logarithms, we have, 
 finally, 
 
 
 (x - 1) 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 5x + l)dx _ (5x + l)dx 
 
 x - 2 " (x - 1) (a? + 2)* 
 
 a; + 2) = ?(a? - I) X (x 
 
 (a; - l)dx 
 y ~ x* + 6x + 8 " (x + 2) (x + 4)' 
 
 y = 
 
 x + 2)* 
 
 " x 3 +x 2 2x x(x 1) (x + 2)* 
 
 4. dv = 
 
 x(x-l)(x + 1)' 
 
 <, y l(x* x). 
 
124 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Second Case. When some of the binomial factors are 
 equal. 
 
 In this case "there are as many partial fractions as 
 there are binomial factors in the denominator; but the 
 denominators of those corresponding to factors of the 
 
 form (x a) m y are respectively of the form (x a) m , 
 (x - a) m ~ 1 ) (x - a) m ~ 2 , etc., down to x - a. 
 Let us assume, 
 
 *, - ( x * + *)<** 
 
 assuming the identical equation, 
 
 (x - 2p (x - 1) = (x^~2^ + x-2 + ~x~^\ W 
 
 and clearing of fractions, we have, 
 
 z 2 + x = A(x 1) + B(x 2) (x 1) 4- C(x 2) 2 ... (2) 
 
 Here again we might find the values of A, B, a id 0, by 
 the ordinary method of indeterminate coefficients ; but it 
 will be simpler to proceed as follows : 
 
 Making x = 2, we find, A = 6 ; 
 Making x = 1, we find, (7=2; 
 
 giving to A and C their values in (2), and then making 
 y> = 0, we find, = - 6 4- 2 + 8 .-. B = - 1. 
 Substituting in (1) and multiplying by dx, we have, 
 
 (x* 4- x)dx 6dx dx 2dx 
 
 _2)~2~(^ 1) ~ (x- 2) 2 ~ x 2 x 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 125 
 
 The first partial fraction can be integrated by Formula 
 29, and the others by Formula 30 ; hence, 
 
 x 2 x Z x 2 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 . -- - . 
 
 X 3 (X 1) 
 
 In this example the equal binomial factors are of the 
 form (x 0) or x, and the assumed identical equation is, 
 
 x* -2 _ A B_ C D 
 x*(x-l)~ x* + x 2 + z + x^l ' 
 
 Clearing of fractions, and performing indicated operations, 
 we have, 
 
 x z - 2 = Ax A + ^ 2 - Bx + Cx 3 Cx* + Dx*. 
 
 Equating the coefficients of like powers in the two mem- 
 bers, and solving the resulting group, we have, A = ^, 
 J3 = 2, = 1, and D 1 ; substituting in (1), and 
 proceeding as before, we have, 
 
 x 
 
 
 j _ _ xdx 
 
 = 
 
126 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Third Case. Wlien some of the factors are imaginary, 
 ~but unequal. 
 
 In this case the product of each pair of imaginary 
 factors is of the form (x a) 2 + b z ; instead of assuming 
 a partial fraction for each imaginary factor, we assume 
 for each pair of such factors a fraction of the form, 
 
 A + Bx 
 
 xa *x 
 
 Assume the identical equation, 
 
 x A -f Bx O 
 
 (1) 
 
 (a. + i) (aj + l) x z + l a: + 1 ' 
 Clearing of fractions, and reducing, 
 
 x = Bx* + (^ + 5)a; + A + Cx* + C (2) 
 
 Equating the coefficients of the like powers of x in the two 
 members, and solving the resulting equations, we have, 
 
 Substituting in (1), and multiplying by dx, we have, 
 xdx _ 1 (1 + x)dx __ 1 dx 
 
 1 / f/a; .T<:fe ^/./: \ 
 
 2 U* + 1 + ^Tl "" a; + 17 
 
 Integrating by Formulas (14) and (30), and reducing, we 
 have, 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION". 12? 
 
 Fourth Case. When some of the binomial factors are 
 imaginary and equal. 
 
 In this case, the denominator will contain one or more 
 
 factors of the form [(a; a) 9 + & 2 ] n ; in determining th< 
 partial fractions, we combine the methods used in the 
 second and third cases. 
 
 Let us assume, 
 
 x 3 dx 
 
 Assume the identical equation, 
 
 r 3 Ax + B Cx + D 
 
 Clearing of fractions, and proceeding as before, we find, 
 A = 2, B = - 4, C = 1, and D = 2. 
 
 Substituting these in (1), multiplying by dx, and separating 
 the fractions, we have, 
 
 . _ 2xdx kdx xdx 
 
 .J /-v.2 O 
 
 2) 2 (x 2 - 2.-C + 2) 2 x* - 2x + 2 
 
 (2) 
 
 ' 
 
 Making (x I) 2 + 1 = z 2 + 1, whence x 1 = z, and 
 dx = dz, we have, 
 
 , _ Z(z + l)dz dz (z + 1)dz 
 
 or, 
 
 2^ zdz Sdz 
 
 y ~ (^T"i) 8 J^Ti 8 * + 1 2* + r 
 
INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 , third, and fourth terms can be integrated by 
 known formulas ; the second is a particular case of the 
 
 form , which can be integrated by the aid of 
 
 (* + D 
 
 Formula D, yet to be deduced. 
 
 Integrating i\\Q first, third, and fourth, and indicating 
 the integration of the second, we have, 
 
 V = - W ~ T - a/TTl + \ 
 
 From what precedes we infer that all rational differen- 
 tials are integrable; consequently, all differentials that 
 can be made rational in terms of a new variable are also 
 integrable. 
 
 Integration by Substitution, and Rationalization. 
 
 67. An irrational differential may sometimes be made 
 rational, by substituting for the variable some function of 
 an auxiliary variable ; when this can be done, the integra- 
 tion may be effected by the methods of Articles 65 and 66. 
 When the differential, can not be rationalized in terms of 
 an auxiliary variable, it may sometimes be reduced to one 
 of the elementary forms, and then integrated. The method 
 of proceeding is best illustrated by examples. 
 
 When the only Irrational Parts are Monomial. 
 
 68. When the only irrational parts are monomial, a dif- 
 ferential can be made rational by substituting for the 
 primitive variable a new variable raised to a power whose 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 129 
 
 exponent is the least common multiple of all the indices 
 in the expression. 
 
 (** x*)dx , x 
 
 Let dy = * -- ..... (1) 
 
 The least common multiple of the indices is 6 ; making 
 
 x = z*, we have, x* = z 3 , x* = 2 4 , a?* = z 2 , and cfo = 
 these substituted in (I), give, 
 
 *9 _ * 
 
 Performing the division indicated, we have, 
 
 dy = 6 (zi z 6 z 5 + z 4 + 2 s z* 
 
 Integrating by known methods, and replacing z by its 
 value, a;*, we have, finally, 
 
 3464 6484 
 
 y = -gfi + y <> + a? - ^ - %* 
 
 6 - 31(1 + o) 
 
 When the only irrational parts are fractional powers 
 of a binomial of the first degree, the differential can be 
 rationalized by the same rule, and consequently can be 
 integrated. 
 
 Let us take the expression, 
 
 dy -= (x + Vx + 2 + ^aT+I) dx 
 
130 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Assume, 
 
 x + 2 = z 9 , whence, x = z* 2, and dx v-u,*. 
 
 Substituting in (2), we have, 
 
 Integrating, and substituting for z its value, (a; -f 2) % we 
 have, 
 
 y = I (x + 2)* - *(x + 2) + | (x + 2)*+ J (z + 2)*. 
 
 Binomial Differentials. 
 
 69. Every binomial differential can be reduced to the 
 
 Form, 
 
 r 
 
 rfy = -4 (a + fa*)*x m ~ l dx ..... (1) 
 
 in which m, n, r, and 5 are whole numbers, and n positive, 
 
 Thus, the expression, (x~ * -f 8flT*)~*aAfe, can be re- 
 
 i_2 1 
 uu ^ u ^ uu * xv^*^ VJ . , /v^ ) %"^cfe by simply removing 
 
 the factor x~~k from under the radical sign. If, in this 
 result, we make x = z*, whence, dx = z 3 dz, it will be- 
 
 come, 4(1 + 2z)~*z 5 dz, which is of the required form. In 
 like manner, any similar expression may be reduced to 
 that form. The constant factor, A, may be omitted during 
 
 integration, and the exponent of the parenthesis, -, may 
 
 s 
 
 be represented by a single letter p, as is done in Article 70. 
 After integration, the factor may be replaced, and the value 
 
 of - may be substituted for p. 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 131 
 
 FIRST CRITERION. 
 
 Form (1) may be integrated by some of the methods 
 
 T 
 
 explained in Articles Go and 66, when - is a whole number. 
 
 SECOND CRITERION. 
 
 Form (1) can be integrated when is a whole number. 
 
 1 
 
 For let us assume (a 4- bx n ) = z* 9 or, z = (a + lx n )*; we 
 have, by solution and differentiation, 
 
 
 
 = \-r) ;a 
 
 and, 
 
 m 
 
 m l , * /* a\~n sl-r 
 
 x m L dx = ^ ( 7 ) z dz. 
 bn\ 1} ) 
 
 Substituting in (1), we find, 
 
 \ / ~ bn\ b ) V. / 
 
 Which expression is integrable, as was shown above, when 
 
 is a whole number. 
 n 
 
 THIRD CRITERION. 
 
 in T 
 Form (1) can be integrated when I- -, is a whole 
 
 number. 
 
 For let us assume, 
 
132 IKTEGKAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Solving and differentiating, we have, 
 
 11 1 m m 
 
 x = (2" = a n (z* - &)"*; x m = a"(z 8 - Z>)~ 
 
 and, 
 
 Substituting in (1), and reducing, we find, 
 
 r m r m r . 
 
 n~ m 1 ^ T+S 1 
 
 ti 
 
 (3) 
 
 Which can be integrated, as was shown above, when 
 
 m r . 
 
 1- -, is a whole number. 
 
 n s 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 .... (4) 
 
 ITl 4 
 
 Here, = - = 2 ; hence, the second criterion is satis- 
 n & 
 
 fied. 
 
 Comparing (2) with (4), we find, 
 
 a = 1, I = 1, n = 2, m = 4, r = 1, s = 2, and z = (1 -f x 2 )*, 
 
 Hence, 
 
 y* /** K i 
 
 / (1 + x z )*x s dx = I (z 9 l}z z dz = 
 
 / / 53 
 
 15 
 
METHODS OF INTEGKATIOK. 133 
 
 = dx(l + Z 2 )~ -* ..... (5) 
 
 Here, -+_ __ _ 2 hence, the third crite- 
 
 n s <i 2 
 
 rion is satisfied. 
 
 Comparing (3) and (5), we find, 
 
 a = 1, 5=1, n = 2, m = 3, r = 1, s = 2, and 
 
 _ 
 
 FTence, 
 
 dx 
 
 Integration by Successive Reduction. 
 
 70. When an integral can be made to depend upon a 
 simpler integral of the same form, it is evident that by 
 successive repetitions of the process, we may ultimately 
 arrive at a form that can be integrated by one of the funda- 
 mental formulas. This method of integration is called 
 the method by successive reduction, and is effected by for- 
 mulas of reduction, sonic of which it is now proposed to 
 investigate. 
 
 1. If in the expression for a binomial differential, we 
 omit the factor A, represent the exponent of the paren- 
 thesis by p, and factor the result, we have, 
 
 fa I- b^x m "^dx = x m ~ n (a + bx n )W~*dx ..... (1) 
 
134 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Let u = x m ~ n , and dv = (a + fa n ) p x n ~*dx. 
 
 Differentiating the first, and integrating the second 
 Formula (29), we have, 
 
 to = (m - n)x-^ d x; and , = ^ 
 
 But, (a + lx n f + l = (a + lx n f (a + lx n ) ; 
 
 a(g + te*) p (a + &g n 
 = 
 
 Substituting in Formula (28), we have, 
 
 bn(p 
 
 n(p 
 
 Transposing the last term to the first member, and re 
 ducing, we have, 
 
 
 ln(p + 
 Dividing by the coefficient in the first member, we have, 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 135 
 
 Formula A enables us to reduce the exponent of the 
 variable without the parenthesis, by the exponent of the 
 variable within the parenthesis, at each application. It 
 fails when pn + m = 0; but in this case, the third crite- 
 rion, (Art. 69), is satisfied, and the expression may be 
 integrated by a previous method. 
 
 2. The expression (a + bx n ) p may be placed under the 
 form, 
 
 or, a(a + lx n f~ l + b(a + bx n ) p ~ l x n ; 
 hence, we may write the equation, 
 
 f(a 
 = of (a + fo n ) p - l x m - l dx + lj\a + 
 
 The last term of this equation can be reduced by 
 Formula A. Eeplacing m by m -f n, p by p 1, and 
 multiplying by Z>, that formula becomes, 
 
 if (a + feY~ 1 z m+ "~ 1 <* 
 
 pn + m pn 
 Substituting in (2), and uniting similar terms, we have, 
 
 C i) m\ 
 
 j (a -*- bx yx ~~ dx 
 J v 
 
 (ct -f- bx ) X pnCt f- , 7l\p 1 7711 7 r Tf\ 
 
 := + / (# ~r C>iC ) X uX . I Jj\ 
 
 pn + m pn + m / 
 
136 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Formula B enables us to reduce the exponent of the 
 parenthesis by 1 at each application. It fails in the same 
 case as Formula A. When m and p are negative, we 
 endeavor to increase instead of diminishing them. For 
 this purpose we reverse Formulas A and B. 
 
 3. Reversing Formula A, and reducing, we have, 
 
 J\a 4- lx n ) p x m - n - l dx 
 
 = (a + ftQP*V- _ (, + M) f lx n Px ^ dXt 
 a(m n) a(m n] / v 
 
 "Replacing m by m + n, we have, 
 
 f(a + WT.1& = - < fl + 
 ./ v 
 
 m + n)r tofiyz 
 v 
 
 4. Reversing Formula B, and reducing, we have, 
 
 f(a + lx n f-^x m - l d X 
 = _ (a + fa")V 
 
 pna 
 In this, substituting p +1 for^?, we have, 
 
 J^ 
 
 ^ 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 137 
 
 The mode of applying Formulas A, B, C, and D, will 
 be illustrated by practical examples. 
 1. Let it be required to integrate the expression, 
 
 In Formula A, making 
 
 a =. r 2 , b 1, n 2, p = , and m = 3, 
 we find, 
 
 /' i /V2 _ ^2^7. r 2 /* i 
 
 ( r t _ <*)*z*dx = - ( -f-^ + -^J (r 2 - x*ydx 
 
 ..... (3) 
 
 In Formula B, making 
 
 a =r 2 , ft = 1, n = 2,p = $, and m = 1, 
 we find, 
 
 * ~ 
 
 But 
 
 / ON -i, / dx . \x 
 
 r* x z ) ^dx I sin -. 
 
 / A/ r g _ ^2 r 
 
 Substituting this in (4), and that result in (3), we have, 
 Snally, 
 
 /(r 2 - x*y 
 
 4 
 r z( r z _ X 2\^ 
 
138 
 
 2. Let dy = 
 
 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 = (- a* + x 
 
 In Formula G, making a = a 2 , b = 1, n = 2, p 
 and m 2, we have, 
 
 / 
 -a 
 
 
 But by Formula (24), 
 
 /_ x -l _i 7 / dk 1 _ i 
 
 a 2 + ic 2 ) % 1 c?a; = I - -- = - sec -. 
 J x^/ x z _ a z a , a 
 
 Substituting in (5), we have, for the value of y, 
 
 dx 
 **- 
 
 L_ __ 
 
 SC 
 
 3. Let dn 
 
 In Formula D, making x = z, a = 1, ft = 1, n = 2, 
 
 = 2, and m = 1, we have, 
 
 But, 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 139 
 
 Hence, we have, for the value of y, 
 
 r dz 
 
 J 7*TT- 
 
 h tan- 1 * 
 
 T 2 tf 
 
 This is the method of integration referred to under the 
 Fourth Case of rational fractions. By a continued ap- 
 plication of Formula D, any expression of the form, 
 
 7~^ -- 2\ n > can ^ e re duced t an integrable form. 
 (a + z ) 
 
 The following additional examples can be reduced to 
 integrable forms by the application of Formulas A, B, C, 
 and D. 
 
 _ 
 sin -. 
 
 tl 
 
 1 f/~ "if 
 
 Ans. y = -x(a* x*)~2+ sin" 1 -. 
 A 6 a 
 
 5. dy = (a* 
 
 6. dy=(l+ x*)x*dx. Ans. y = - 
 
 3 . _ 
 
140 LNTEGKAL CALCULUS. 
 
 5. Let it be required to simplify the expression, 
 x n dx 
 
 Changing the form and removing the factor x from under 
 the radical sign, we have, 
 
 in formula A, making, 
 
 a = 2a, b = - 1, n = 1, p = J, and m = n + $, 
 and reducing, we have, 
 
 l(pn + m) = n, and a(m n) = 2a(n i) = a(2n 1) ; 
 hence, 
 
 71-1 , 
 
 a; V 2ax 
 
 /* X U dx 
 
 I = 
 
 / ^\/2ax x 2 
 
 ,9,,_1U/ ,-!& ^ 
 
 Formula E enables us to reduce the exponent n by 1, 
 at each application ; if n is entire and positive, by a con- 
 tinued application of the formula we ultimately arrive at 
 
 the form, / ' , which is equal to versin" 1 -. 
 J v2axx 2 a 
 
1. dy = 
 
 METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 141 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 xdx 
 
 J /y 
 
 Ans. y = V%ax x 2 + a versin" -. 
 * a 
 
 Certain Trinomial Differentials. 
 
 71. Every trinomial differential that can be reduced to 
 the form 
 
 P 
 (a + lx x*fx m dx (1) 
 
 can be made rational in terms of an auxiliary variable, 
 and consequently can be integrated, when p and m are 
 whole numbers. 
 
 When p is even, the expression is already rational; 
 when p is odd, say of the form 2n + 1, the expression 
 becomes, 
 
 (a + lx x*) n (a + lx x^x m dx (2) 
 
 in which the only irrational part is Va 4- bx =fc x 2 . There 
 may be two cases; first, when x z is positive, and secondly, 
 when x 2 is negative. 
 
14:2 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 1. When x z is positive. 
 Assume, 
 
 Va + bx + x 2 = z x; /. a + "bx + x 2 = z 9 2zx + x* j 
 striking out the common term x 2 , and solving, we have, 
 
 z 2 a 
 
 ; /. dx = 
 
 fyfi T 
 
 and 
 
 4^4^ (3) 
 
 Substituting these in (2), the result will be rational. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ~ (4) 
 
 Comparing (4) with (1), we find, a = 1, and 5 = 1. 
 Hence, from (3), we have, 
 
 + 1 
 
 Substituting in (4), and making z = x + V 1 + x + x 2 , 
 we hare, 
 
 y = l(%z + 1) = Z(2Z + 1 + 2 VI 
 
 ^ 2 a; 1 
 
 Ans. y = Z(2a; - 1 + 2Vx 2 x - 1). 
 
METHODS OF INTEGKATIOtf. 143 
 
 3 . rfy= __J|==. 
 
 Ans. y if -====\. 
 
 \ * "^ I V "^ r *v i ** X 
 
 S. IFAew x 9 is negative. 
 
 Let a and j3 be taken so as to satisfy the equation, 
 
 a + bx - x* = (x - a)(/J - x) (5) 
 
 Assume 
 
 Va + bx x 2 = V(x a)(# x) (x a)g; 
 squaring and reducing, we have, 
 
 P-x = (x a)z* ; or, z = 
 
 hence, 
 
 _ ff + ag8 
 
 : T+"^" ; 
 
 and 
 
 These values substituted in (1), will make it rational. 
 
 T , , 
 
 Let e = 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 dx dx 
 
 -*) 
 
 .-. a = - 2, and /S = 1 (7) 
 
144 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 From (C), we have, 
 6zdz 
 
 Substituting in (7), we find, 
 
 also z = A / - . 
 
 A 
 
 = - 2tan- 1 
 
 r + z z ' y - |/ jr+2 
 
 Integration by Series. 
 
 72. It is often convenient to develop a differential into 
 a series, arranged according to the ascending powers of 
 the variable, and then to integrate each term separately. 
 This method sometimes enables us to find an approxi- 
 mate value for an integral, which cannot be found in any 
 other manner; it also enables us to deduce many useful 
 formulas. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. dy = 
 
 Developing (1 x 2 ) * by the binomial formula, and 
 multiplying each term by x 2 dx, w r e have, 
 
 X 3 X 6 X 
 
 'y=w -TO -56-ifl - eta 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 145 
 
 By Formula (14) y is equal to tan" 1 ^. Developing bj 
 the binomial formula, we have, 
 
 (1 + x*)~ l = 1 x 2 + ?; 4 x* + x 8 z 10 + etc. 
 Substituting, and integrating, we have the Formula, 
 
 __1 x 3 x 5 x' 1 x 9 
 
 tall z =a ,.__ + ___ + __etc. 
 
 = (1 x 4- x z x* + etc.)dx 
 y = 1(1 + x) = x - |- + f- - |- + etc. 
 
 3x s 
 
 Integration of Transcendental Differentials. 
 
 73. A transcendental differential is one that is expressed 
 in terms of some transcendental quantity. There are three 
 principal classes; viz., logarithmic, exponential, and cir- 
 cular. 
 
 Logarithmic Differentials. 
 
 74. A large ir'imber of cases come under the general 
 form, 
 
 dy = z m - l (lx) n dx (1) 
 
146 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Assume, 
 
 u = (Ix) 71 , and dv = x m ~ l dx; 
 
 .: du = ^-^ ' -' and v = > 
 
 2; T/Z. 
 
 substituting in Formula (28), and reducing, we have. 
 
 y = 
 
 Formula ,F is a formula of reduction ; it reduces the 
 exponent of (Ix) by 1 at each application. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 1. dy = x(to)*dx. 
 
 2. rfy = 
 
 3. dti = 
 
 Am. y = 
 Eeversing Formula ^ and reducing, we have, 
 
 Replacing w 1 by w, and reducing, we have, 
 
 /^J_^ = __ x^ __ + m /?^~V* 
 (lx} n (n - 1) (Ix) 71 ' 1 + n- lJ\U)> 1 - 1 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 147 
 
 The continued application of formula G gives as a final 
 
 / v m lfl x 
 n ., which can be integrated 
 (ix) 
 
 by series. It fails when n = 1. Let m = 0, and n = I ; 
 we then have, 
 
 Exponential Differentials. 
 
 75. Let it be required to integrate an expression of the 
 form, 
 
 dij = x m a x dx (1) 
 
 Assume, 
 
 u x m , and dv a x dx\ .: du = mx m dx, and v = r . 
 
 la 
 
 0* 
 
 u = mx"" ~tlx, and v = 
 Substituting in Formula (28), 
 
 / la la J 
 
 When m < 1, we have, 
 
 fifdx = <F la fifdx 
 
 ** x m ~ (m-l}x m - 1 m-l^x- 1 
 
INTEGRAL CALCULUb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. dy = xa x da\ A us. .y ~j~\ x ~~ T~ )' 
 
 2. dy = x*a x dx. 
 
 a x f 3 3 2 (jx 6 \ 
 
 AnS.y = T -\X -- : -- \- yy-r- I. 
 
 te\ / (/rt) 2 (/) v 
 
 e'Yfa ^ -/e^fo 
 
 3. dy - j- . Ans. y -- + I- 
 
 x 2 x J x 
 
 But by means of McLaurin's Formula, we find, 
 
 hence, 
 
 x , xdx 
 
 which, being substituted above, gives, 
 
 4. dy = x*e x dx. Ans. y = e x (x* - Zx + 2). 
 
 Circular Differentials. 
 
 76. Circular differentials may be integrated by the 
 methods of transformation and successive reduction, or 
 they may be reduced to algebraic forms by making 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 149 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 - T , , dx 
 
 1. Let av = - . 
 
 smx 
 
 Prom trigonometry, we have, 
 
 smx = 2sin^cosjx = 2tanJ#cos* 
 
 or, 
 
 dx dx 
 
 smx ~ 2tan %xcos 2 ^x ~ tanjz " 
 Hence, 
 
 - = Z(tanjz) ..... (1) 
 smx 
 
 T , 7 
 
 2. Let dy = - . 
 cosx 
 
 If we make x equal to 90 x in the preceding formula, 
 and reduce, we have, 
 
 3. Let dr = 
 
 From trigonometry, we have, 
 
 Hence, 
 
 sinz do? ^Ircosa; 
 
 tana; = -- ; or, - - = ; --- = ^ 
 
 coso: taiue smx smx 
 
 =Z(sina;) ..... (3) 
 tuna; 
 
150 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 I T 1 7 $ X 
 
 4. Let ay = . 
 
 cote 
 
 Making x equal to 90 x in (3), and reducing, we have, 
 
 rdx = _ ..... ( 
 
 J cotx 
 
 5. Let dy = -J^. 
 
 smftoosz 
 
 From trigonometry, we have, 
 
 sin^cosa; = 
 
 we also have, 
 
 dx = 
 
 hence, 
 
 dx _d(2x) 
 
 Applying Formula (1), we have, 
 
 r dx 
 
 J s 
 
 Let us have the expression, 
 
 dy sin m o;cos n ^^ ..... (6) 
 Making sinz = z, whence cosx *J\ z z , 
 
 and dx = - . 
 Vl - z* 
 we have, 
 
 71-1 
 
 dy = z m (l - z 2 ) 3 dz ..... (7) 
 
 Form (7) can always be integrated when m and n are 
 whole numbers, because it will then satisfy one of the three 
 criterions (Art. 09). 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 151 
 
 6. dy &'m z xcos & xdx. 
 
 Comparing with (6). w* find in = 2. and n -- 3; hence, 
 from (7), we have, 
 
 dy = (1 - z*)z*dz; /. y = - - ~ = 
 
 i 
 
 7. Let dy = sh\*xdx. 
 
 Here m = 3, and n 0; and dy = (1 z*) 
 making x = z, a = 1, = 1, n = 2, j9 = J, and m = 4, 
 in Formula A, we have, 
 
 But from Formula (29), 
 
 hence, 
 
 \ (1 - zrfz* - |(1 - z )t =' - i 
 
 8. Let dy = cos z xdx = dz^/\ ~z 2 . 
 Applying Formula (B), we find, 
 
 But, 
 
152 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Hence, 
 
 y -(coszsince + x). 
 
 ^ 
 
 flnft (1 y, 
 
 9. Let dy = ^^ = ^ = (1 - z 8 ) 
 
 Applying Formula (7, we have, 
 
 But, 
 
 Hence, 
 
 10. Let c?v = -,--%- = ,., ^ ,,, = (!-**)" Vfe, 
 
 22 
 
 By Formula Z), we have, 
 
 /(I _ g ) 
 But, 
 
 sin.rcosa; 
 Hence, 
 
 ?/ = i 4- /(tana;). 
 4/ 2cos 2 o; 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 153 
 
 11. Let dy = tsm^xdx = (1 z 2 )' 
 y Jtan s o; tanjc 4- x. 
 
 EXAMPLES IN SUCCESSIVE INTEGRATION. 
 
 Making sinz = z, whence, d z y = z(dz) 2 , we have, 
 dy z 2 z 3 
 
 & = a" + ' y = 6~ + + ' 
 
 or, 
 
 = ^_? + ^g^^, + @ m 
 o 
 
 13. c? 2 y = cosxsm*xdx 2 = cosa:(</coscc) 8 ; 
 
 ^?y 1 
 
 **' /7f \ = o COS x + ^ 
 
 and 
 
 y = - co& 3 x + Cfcosa; + 6*. 
 b 
 
 Integration of Differential Functions of two Variables. 
 
 77. A total differential of a function of two variables is 
 of the form, 
 
 <& = Pdx + Qdij (1) 
 
 7* 
 
154 LNTECltAL CALCULUS. 
 
 In which P and Q are functions of x and y ; but differ- 
 ential expressions of that form are not necessarily total 
 differentials. That they may be so, they must (Eq. 5, 
 Art. 2G), satisfy the condition, 
 
 dP dQ 
 
 dy ^ dx~ W 
 
 When an expression of the form (1) is to be integrated, 
 we first apply the test expressed by (2) ; if that be satisfied, 
 the expression is integrable. To perform the integration, 
 integrate one of the partial differentials with reference to 
 its corresponding variable, that is, as though the other 
 variable were constant, and add such a function of that va- 
 riable as will satisfy equation (1). Thus, to integrate ex- 
 pression (1), we have, 
 
 z = Cpdx + R (3) 
 
 in which R is a function of y alone. The value of R may 
 be found by differentiating the second member of (3) with 
 respect to y, and placing its partial differential coefficient 
 equal to Q. Hence, we have, 
 
 d/Pdx 
 
 dy dy 
 
 Transposing, multiplying by dy, and integrating with 
 respect to y, that is, as though x were constant, we find, 
 
METHODS OF INTEGRATION. 155 
 
 Substituting in (3), we find, 
 
 //Y dfpdx 
 Pdx+ J ( Q - 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. dz = 3x z y 2 dx + 2x*ydy. 
 
 Here P = 3x*ij*, and Q = 2x*y, and (2) is satisfied. 
 Integrating by Formula (4), we hare, 
 
 z = z 3 y 2 + 2x 9 y 2x*y)dy = x*y* -f C. 
 
 2. dz = ydx + xdy. 
 The test (2) is satisfied. Integrating by (4), we have, 
 
 z = yx + i (xdy xdy)dy yx -f 0. 
 
 By Formula (4), we have, 
 
 z = 
 
 4. dz = (oxy y*)dx + (3a; 2 %xy}dy 
 + 
 
 y*x + f(3x z 2xy 3x 9 
 
PART IV. 
 
 APPLICATIONS OF THE INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 I. LENGTHS OF PLANE CURVES. 
 
 Rectification. 
 
 78. Rectification is the operation of finding an expres- 
 sion for the length of a curve. This may be done by 
 finding an element of the length, as explained in Art. 51, 
 and then integrating it between proper limits. If we 
 apply the integral sign to Equation (1), Art. 51, we have, 
 
 L =Vdx* + dy* ..... (1) 
 
 1. To rectify the semi-cubic parabola, whose equation is, 
 
 Differentiating and substituting in (1), we have, 
 
 (2) 
 
 Integrating by Formula (29) , we have, 
 
 L = ^(4a* + 9y) + ..... (3) 
 As explained in Art. GO, this integral is indefinite, anti 
 
LENGTHS OF PLANE CURVES. 157 
 
 expresses the length of an arc from any ordinate up to tiny 
 other ordinate. 
 
 If we estimate the length from a point whose ordinate 
 is 0, the length at that point is 0, and, from (3), making 
 L y and y 0, we have, 
 
 Substituting this value of C in (3), and denoting the cor- 
 responding value of L by L', we have, 
 
 This is a particular integral, and it expresses the length 
 of the arc from the particular ordinate 0, up to any 
 ordinate y. 
 
 If we wish to find the length from the particular ordi- 
 nate 0, up to an ordinate #, we make y b, in (4). Doing 
 so, and denoting the corresponding value of L' by JJ\ 
 we have, 
 
 "= + )*- IT ..... ( g ) 
 
 This is the definite integral, and expresses the length of 
 the arc from the ordinate 0, up to the ordinate b. 
 
 In this case the limits are and I ; the integral may be 
 found otherwise, as follows : 
 
 Making y = 0, in (3), and denote the corresponding 
 value of L by LQ, we have, 
 
158 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Making y = #, in (3), and denoting the corresponding 
 value of L by L b , we have, 
 
 X 4 = ^(4t + 9S)* +0 ---- (7) 
 
 Equation (6) expresses the length of the curve from any 
 point up to the point whose ordinate is 0, and (7) ex- 
 presses the length of the arc from the same point up to a 
 point whose ordinate is b ; the first taken from the second 
 will therefore be the definite integral, and will express, as 
 before, the length of the arc from the point whose ordinate 
 is 0, up to the point whose ordinate is b. Making the 
 subtraction, and adopting the notation explained in Art. 60, 
 we have, 
 
 b 
 
 L " = 
 
 
 
 The same result as found in (5). In this case the initial 
 
 3 
 
 abscissa is and the terminal abscissa is - . 
 
 a 
 
 2. To rectify the cycloid, wJiose differential equation 
 (Art. 56), is 
 
 - y 
 Substituting, in (1), and reducing, we have, 
 
 L = 
 
 Integrating between the limits and 2r Formula (29), 
 we have, 
 
 2r 
 
LENGTHS OF PLAHE CURVES. 159 
 
 This is the expression for half of one branch. Hence, the 
 whole branch is equal to eight times the radius of the 
 generating circle. 
 
 3. To rectify the circle, whose equation is, 
 
 y = (r* - xrf. 
 
 Differentiating, substituting in (1), and developing by 
 the binomial formula, we have, 
 
 L = rf(r* - x*)~tdx = f(dx + ^ . x*dx + ^ 
 
 Performing the integration, making r = 1, and com- 
 mencing the arc at the point whose abscissa is 0, that is, 
 at the upper extremity of the vertical diameter, we have, 
 
 Formula (13) may be used for finding the length of an 
 arc, but the series is not very converging, and therefore 
 the process is tedious. We know, when x = J, that L' is 
 equal to an arc of 30, that is, to -J-tf. Making L' = $*, 
 and x = , we have, 
 
 5* = I + sis + ^75 + W&J + etc " = - 
 
 = 3.1415 
 
 4. A better method for deducing the value of if, is to 
 find the length of the arc, in terms of its tangent. 
 
 If L = tan a;, we have (Art. 18), 
 
 dL = = 1 + x '~ 1<lx - 
 
160 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Developing by the binomial formula, we have, 
 
 dL = dx(l - x* -f x* - x 6 + x 8 - etc.) ..... (15) 
 Integrating, and determining (7, as before, we have, 
 x 3 x s x 11 x 9 
 
 i= *-T + 5--r + -- etc 
 
 To render (16) converging, x must be made small 
 Assume the trigonometrical formula, 
 
 tana + tanJ 
 
 and let a tan" 1 ???, b = tan" 1 ^, and a + I = tan l j 
 
 then will 
 
 m + n z m nff . 
 
 z - - ; or, n -= ..... (17) 
 1 mn mz + 1 
 
 1 2 
 
 [f z 1, and m = -, we have, n -\ 
 o o 
 
 /. tan" 1 1 = tan" 1 ^ + tan" 1 ! 
 
 o 
 
 21 7 
 
 If z = -, and wi = -, we have, n ^ ; 
 
 71 9 
 
 If 2 = , and m = -, we have, w = ; 
 
 17 4:0 
 
 . 
 
 91 1 
 
 If z = , and OT = -, we hare, n - - ^ 
 
 
AREAS OF PLANE CURVES. 1C] 
 
 Hence, "by successive substitution, we find, 
 
 - 4 = tan" 1 1 = 4tan- 1 i - tan" 1 -^- . . .\. . (18) 
 4 5 /coJ 
 
 If we make x -, in Equation (1C), we find the value of 
 5 
 
 tau 1 r, and. in like manner, we find the tan ^r; sub- 
 
 /vO J 
 
 stituting them in (18), and reducing, we have the value of 
 if. With very little labor, the value of if may be found to 
 8 or 10 places of decimals. 
 
 II. AREAS OF PL AXE CURVES. 
 
 Quadrature. 
 
 79. Quadrature is the operation of finding an expression 
 for the area of a portion of a plane bounded by a curve, 
 the axis of abscissas, and any two ordinates. This is done 
 by finding an expression for the elementary area, as ex- 
 plained in Art. 51, and then integrating the result between 
 proper limits. Applying the sign of integration to For- 
 mula (2), Art. 51, we have, 
 
 A = 
 
 1". To find the area of a parabola, whose equation is, 
 
 2/2 2px. 
 Finding the value of ?/, and substituting in (1), we have, 
 
 A = Vtyxdx = . a + ..... (2) 
 
162 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 If we commence the area at the ordinate 0, we have,, 
 C = ; hence, 
 
 (3) 
 
 That is, the area of any portion of a parabola, reckoned 
 from the vertex, is two-thirds the rectangle of its terminal 
 co-ordinates. 
 
 2. To find the area of a circle, whose equation is 9 
 
 y - V 
 tf ibstituting in (1), we find, 
 
 A 
 
 = C(r* -xrfdx ..... (4) 
 
 Reducing by Formula J3, and integrating the last term 
 by Formula (20), we have, 
 
 _*(r-*')* 
 
 Taking the integral uetween the limits, x = and x = r, 
 which gives the area of a quadrant, and remembering that 
 
 sin"" 1 1 sin"" 1 = Jtf, we have, 
 
 T" 1 1 cfT* 2 
 
 /I" = [sin 1 sin 0] = -: ; .'. Area = *7' 2 . . . (6) 
 
 A 4: 
 
 3. To find the area of the ellipse, whose equation is, 
 
 / r-_//rt _ ^2\i 
 
AREAS OF PLANE CURVES. 163 
 
 Substituting in (1), and integrating, as in the last example, 
 we have, 
 
 Integrating from x = to x = a, and multiplying by 4, we 
 Lave, for the area of the ellipse, 
 
 A" =*ab (8) 
 
 4. To find the area of the cycloid, whose diffeimtial 
 equation is, 
 
 Substituting in (1), we find, 
 
 f* y*dy 
 
 f 
 
 Applying Formula E twice, and Formula (26) once, wo. 
 find, 
 
 yV%ry - y* 
 ~2~ 
 
 + <r ~ V%ry y* + rversin" 1 ^1 4- 0. 
 
 Taking the integral between the limits y = 0, and y = 2r, 
 and multiplying by 2, we find, for the area of the cycloid, 
 
 2A" = 3r* ..... (10) 
 
 That is, the area between one branch and the directing 
 line is three times the area of the generating circle. 
 
 5. To find the area of the logarithmic curve, whose 
 equation is, y = Ix. 
 
164 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Substituting iu (1), we have, 
 
 A =f(lx)dx ---- (11) 
 
 Making m = 1 and n 1, in Formula F, and reducing, 
 we have, 
 
 A = xlx - x + ..... (12) 
 
 If we commence the arc at the ordinate corresponding to 
 <r. = 1, we have, (7=1, and 
 
 A' = x(to-l) + l ..... (13) 
 
 6. To find the area of a rectangular hyperbola^, bounded 
 by the curve, one asymptote, and any two ordinates to that 
 asymptote. 
 
 Assume the equation, 
 
 xy = m, and make m = 1, whence y -. 
 
 x 
 
 Substituting in (1), we have, 
 
 A = = lx + c 
 
 Commencing the area from the ordinate through the vertex, 
 where x = 1, we have, (7=0; hence, 
 
 A'=lx ..... (15) 
 
 That is, the area commencing from the ordinate through 
 the vertex is the Napierian logarithm of the terminal ab- 
 scissa. Had we not made m 1, we should, in like man- 
 ner, have found 
 
 A' = mlx. 
 
 In which the area is equal to the logarithm in a system 
 whose modulus is m. 
 
AREAS OF SURFACES OF REVOLUTION. IG5 
 
 III. AREAS OF SURFACES OF REVOLUTION. 
 
 Surfaces Generated by the Revolution of Plane Curves. 
 
 8(fc The area of a portion of a surface of revolution, 
 bounded by two planes perpendicular to its axis, is de- 
 termined by finding an expression for an elementary zone, 
 as explained in Art. 51, and integrating the result between 
 proper limits. Applying the sign of integration to For- 
 mula (3), Art. 51, we have, 
 
 + dy* ..... (1) 
 
 1. To find the surface of a sphere, the equation of the 
 generating circle being, y =. (r 2 x 2 )^. 
 
 Differentiating, we have, dy (r 2 x 2 )~ixdx; sub- 
 stituting the values of y and dy in (1), and integrating 
 from r to + r, we have, 
 
 = 2rjdx = 4r* (2) 
 
 8" 
 
 r 
 
 Hence, the area of the surface of a sphere is equal to four 
 great circles, or to two-thirds the surface of the circum- 
 scribed cylinder. 
 
 2. To find the surface of a right cone. 
 
 The equation of the generating line, the vertex of the 
 cone being at the origin, is 
 
 y = ax ; /. dy = adx. 
 
1.66 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Substituting in (1), and reducing, we have, 
 
 S = ZiraVl + a z jxdx = ax 2 Vl + a 2 + C ..... (3) 
 
 If the initial plane pass through the vertex, we have, for 
 that plane, S = 0, and x = 0, whence (7=0; hence, 
 
 S r = *ax 2 Vl + a 2 = *y X #A/1 + a 2 ..... (4) 
 
 But a is the tangent of the semi-angle of the cone, and 
 consequently x^\ + a 2 is the slant height; 2*y is the 
 circumference of the cone's base; hence, the convex sur- 
 face is equal to half the circumference of the base into the 
 slant height. 
 
 3. To find the surface of the paraboloid of revolution. 
 Assume the equation y 2 = 2px, whence, 
 
 y = %px, and dy 2 dx 2 . 
 
 &X 
 
 Substituting in (1), and reducing, we have, 
 
 a = 2* fip* + 2px)ldx = - (p 2 + 2px)? + C ---- (5) 
 If the initial plane pass through the vertex, we have, 
 
 Which, in (5), gives, 
 
 4 C . To find the surface generated by revolving one branch 
 of a cycloid about its base. 
 
VOLUMES OF SOLIDS OF REVOLUTION. 1G7 
 
 Assuming the equation, dx = db -, and substi- 
 
 tuting in (1), we have, 
 
 (7) 
 
 Applying Formula A, and integrating the last term by 
 Formula (29), we have, 
 
 (2r - y) + (2r - y) + 6'. 
 Integrating between the limits y and ?/ = 2r, we havo, 
 
 -r ..... (8) 
 
 This is the surface generated by half of one branch. 
 Hence, to find the whole surface, we multiply by 2. This 
 gives 
 
 IV. VOLUMES OF SOLIDS OF REVOLUTION. 
 
 Cubature. 
 
 81. Cubature is the operation of finding the volume of a 
 solid. When this is bounded by a surface of revolution 
 and two planes perpendicular to its axis, the volume may 
 be ascertained by finding the volume of an element 
 bounded by two such planes infinitely near to each 
 other, as explained in Art. 51, and then integrating the 
 
108 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 result between proper limits. Applying the sign of inte- 
 gration to Formula (4), Art. 51, we have, 
 
 V = *fy*dx (1) 
 
 1. To find the volume of a sphere. 
 
 Assume the equation, y z r 2 x 2 , and combine it with 
 (]) ; we have, 
 
 C. 
 
 Taking the integral between the limits, x = r, and 
 x = + r, we find, 
 
 V" = 2r* ~~ = T = 4*r 2 X r ..... (2) 
 
 That is, the volume is equal to the surface ~by one-third the 
 radius. 
 
 2. To find the volume of a spheroid of revolution. 
 
 There are two species of spheroids of revolution. 
 
 1st. The prolate spheroid, generated by revolving an 
 ellipse about its transverse axis. 
 
 2dly. The oblate spheroid, generated by revolving an 
 ellipse about its conjugate axis. 
 
 1st. The prolate spheroid. In this case the equation of 
 
 2 
 
 the meridian curve is, y 2 = (a 2 x z ). Substituting 
 
 this in (1), and integrating between the limits x = a, 
 and x = + a, we have, 
 
 - x*)dx = zb*a = !** X 2a ..... (3) 
 
VOLUMES OF SOLIDS OF KEYOLUTIOJS". 1G9 
 
 That is, the volume is equal to two-thirds of the circum- 
 scribing cylinder. 
 
 2dly. The oblate spheroid. In this case, if the conjugate 
 axis coincide with the axis of x, the equation of the meri- 
 
 a 2 
 dian curve is, y 2 = (b 2 x 2 ). Substituting in (1), and 
 
 integrating from b to + I, we have, 
 
 V" = \a 2 b = la 2 X%b ..... (4) 
 o o 
 
 Hence, as before, we have, the volume equal to two-thirds 
 the circumscribing cylinder.^ 
 
 In both cases, if a = b r, we have, 
 
 V" = ^3 ..... (5) 
 
 This hypothesis causes the ellipsoids to merge into tne 
 sphere. 
 
 3. To find the volume of a paraboloid of revolution. 
 
 The equation of the meridian curve is, y 2 = 2px. Hence, 
 from (1), we have, 
 
 V = %pixdx = px 2 + C ..... (6) 
 
 If the initial plane pass through the vertex, we have 
 (7=0, and 
 
 V = px 2 = y 2 X \x . . . . (7) 
 
 That is, the volume is equal to half the cylinder that has the 
 same base and the same altitude. 
 
170 INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 4. To find the volume generated by revolving one branch 
 of the cycloid about its base. 
 
 The differential equation of the meridian curve is, 
 
 hence, from (1), we have, 
 
 Keducing by Formula E, integrating the last term by For- 
 mula (26), and taking the integral between the limits, 
 y = 0, and y 2r, we find,' for one-half the volume 
 required, 
 
 V" = *r 3 , or2F" = 5* 2 /- 3 = fl r(2r) X 2r ..... (8) 
 
 A o 
 
 Hence, the volume is equal tofive-eighklis the circumscribing 
 cylinder. 
 
 5. To find the volume generated by revolving the loj'triih- 
 mic curve about the axis of numbers. 
 
 The equation of the generatrix is y = Ix. Hence, 
 V= C(lxydx ..... (9) 
 
 Reducing by Formula F, we have, 
 
 V = [x(lx)* - 2(xlx - x)] + 0. 
 
 If the initial plane pass through the point whose 
 abscissa is 1, we have, C 2^. Hence, 
 
 2+1)] ..... (10) 
 
PART V. 
 
 APPLICATIONS OF THE DIFFERENTIAL AND 
 INTEGRAL CALCULUS TO MECHANICS AND 
 ASTRONOMY. 
 
 I. CENTRE OF GRAVITY. 
 
 82. In what follows, bodies are supposed to be homoge- 
 neous ; the weight of any part of a body is therefore pro- 
 portional to its volume, and consequently the weight of 
 the unit of volume may be taken as the unit of weight. 
 Points, lines, and surfaces are supposed to be material: 
 A material point is a body whose length, breadth, and 
 thickness are infinitesimal ; a material line is a line 
 whose length is finite, and whose breadth and thickness 
 are infinitesimal; a material surface is a body whose 
 length and breadth are finite, and whose thickness is infi- 
 nitesimal; under this supposition a point is an elementary 
 portion of a line, a line is an elementary portion of a sur- 
 face, and a surface is an elementary portion of a solid. 
 
 The weights of the elements of a body are directed 
 toward the centre of the earth, and because the bodies 
 treated of are exceedingly small in comparison with the 
 earth, these weights may be regarded as a system of par- 
 allel forces; hence, the weight of a body is equal to the 
 sum of the weights of its elements and is parallel to 
 them. 
 
172 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 The centre of gravity of a body is a point through which 
 its weight always passes. This point may be found by the 
 principle of moments, which may be enunciated as follows: 
 the moment of the resultant of any number of forces, with 
 respect to an axis, is equal to the algebraic sum of the 
 moments of the forces, with respect to the same axis. 
 (Mechanics., Art. 35.) 
 
 In applying this principle, we assume the following re- 
 sults of demonstrations in mechanics : 1. The centre of 
 gravity of a straight line is at its middle point; 2. The 
 centre of gravity of a plane figure is in that plane ; 3. If 
 a plane figure have a line of symmetry, its centre of gravity 
 is on that line ; and 4. If a solid have a plane of symmetry, 
 its centre of gravity is in that plane. (Mechanics, Arts. 44, 
 45, 46.) 
 
 To deduce general formulas for finding the centre of 
 gravity of a body, assume a system of co-ordinate axes that 
 are to retain a fixed position with respect to the body, but 
 that change position when the body moves; denote the 
 volume, and consequently the weight, of any element of 
 the body by dv, and the co-ordinates of its centre of 
 gravity by x, y, and z; denote the weight of the body by 
 
 v = I dv, and the co-ordinates of its centre of gravity by 
 a,, y 1? and z r 
 
 If the body be placed in such a position that the plane 
 xy is horizontal, the weights of the elements and of the 
 body are parallel to the axis of z, the moment of the body, 
 
 with respect to the axis of y, is ^1 dv, the moment 
 of any element, with respect to the same axis, is 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 173 
 
 and the algebraic sum of the moments of all the elements 
 \alxdvj hence, from the principle of moments, we have, 
 
 / fxdv 
 lv = Ixdv ; .: x 1 = -~ (1) 
 J Idv 
 
 In like manner, we have, 
 
 
 If the body be turned about so that the plane yz is 
 horizontal, we have, in like manner, 
 
 Cd V =r y dv; s.y !=?-%- (2) 
 
 / / I dv 
 
 //* 
 !v=lz 
 J 
 
 I zdv 
 zdv; .: z l = J 7 (3) 
 
 /* 
 
 "When the body is in a plane, that plane may be taken 
 as the plane xy, in which case z l = ; if the body have an 
 axis of symmetry, that may be taken as the axis of x, in 
 which case z 1 = 0, and y l 0. 
 
 Centre of Gravity of a Circular Arc. 
 
 83. Let the radius perpendicular to the chord of the arc 
 be taken as the axis of x ; then will z lt and y } be equal fc 
 0. Denote the radius of the circle by r, ^ A 
 the chord by c y and the arc by A. The 
 origin being at the centre, the equation of 
 the arc is, y 2 = r 2 x 2 ; hence, 
 
 th = 
 
 =-TC 
 
 c 
 
 Fig. 16. 
 
 rdy __ rdy 
 
 x 
 12* 
 
174 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Substituting in (1), and integrating between the limits, 
 y = j, and y = + \c, we "have, for the numerator, 
 
 Jrdy = rc, 
 
 and for the denominator, 
 
 / / .2_ 2/ s L 2r 2rJ 
 
 -ic 
 
 Hence, 
 
 /*/ 
 
 : : r : a: 
 
 That is, /Ae ce?^re of gravity of the arc of a circle is on the 
 diameter that bisects the chord, and its distance from the 
 centre is a fourth proportional to the arc, its chord, and 
 the radius. 
 
 Centre of Gravity of a Parabolic Area. 
 
 84. Let the area be limited by a double ordinate, and 
 denote the extreme abscissa by a. From the equation of 
 the curve, y* = 2px, we have, 
 
 y = 
 
 /. dv = ydx = V%p x*dx, 
 
 _ o 
 
 and xdv v%p - ofidx. 
 Substituting in (1). and integrating between 
 the limits and a, we have, 
 
 3 
 *i - 5 * 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 1?5 
 
 That is, the centre of gravity is on the axis, at a distance 
 from tlie vertex equal to three-fifths the altitude of Hie 
 segment. 
 
 Centre of Gravity of a Semi-ellipsoid of Revolution. 
 
 85. Let the axis of the ellipsoid be taken as the axis 
 of x. Then, if the origin be taken at the centre, the 
 equation of the generating curve is 
 
 In this case, we have, 
 
 B u 
 
 dv vy*dx = * (a 2 x z )dx, 
 
 b 2 
 
 and xdv = it - (a 2 x x s )dx. 
 a 2 
 
 Substituting in (1), and integrating between the limits 
 x 0, and x = a, we have, 
 
 That is, the centre of gravity of a semi-prolate spheroid 
 of revolution is on its axis of revolution, and at a distance 
 from the centre equal to three-sixteenths the major axis of 
 the generating ellipse. 
 
 If we change a to #, and b to a, we find for the semi- 
 oblate spheroid, 
 
 3. 3 _ 
 
176 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. . 
 
 Centre of Gravity of a Cone. 
 
 86. Let the axis of the cone be the axis of x, and the 
 vertex of the cone at the origin ; denote the altitude by h, 
 and the radius of the base by r ; then will the tangent of the 
 
 
 
 semi-angle of the cone be =-, the equation of the generating 
 
 li 
 
 T 
 
 line will be y x, and we have, 
 
 dv = *y z dx = if 7-r x*dx, and xdv = 
 
 li* if 
 
 Substituting in (1), and integrating between the limits 
 
 and h, we have, 
 
 _ 3 
 
 Centre of Gravity of a Paraboloid of Revolution. 
 
 87. Let the axis of the paraboloid be taken as the axis of 
 x. The equation of the parabola being y 2 = 2px, we have, 
 
 ;, and xdv = 
 
 Substituting in (1), and integrating from x to x = a t 
 
 we have, 
 
 2 
 
 II. MOMENT OF INERTIA. 
 
 Definitions and Preliminary Principles. 
 
 88. The moment of inertia of a body with respect to an 
 axis, is equal to the algebraic sum of the products obtained 
 by multiplying the mass of each element of the body by 
 the square of its distance from the axis. If we take the 
 axis through the centre of gravity of the bodv. and denote 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 177 
 
 the mass of an element by dm, its distance from the axis 
 by z, and the moment of inertia by IY, we have, 
 
 K=J**dm (l) 
 
 If we take any parallel axis at a distance d from the 
 assumed axis, and denote the moment of inertia with 
 respect to it by K', we have (Mechanics, Art. 123). 
 
 K'= K + md* (2) 
 
 Moment of Inertia of a Straight Line. 
 
 89. Let the axis be taken through the centre of gravity 
 
 of the line and perpendicular to it. Let AB represent the 
 line, CD the axis, and E any ele- 
 
 ment. Denote the length of the | [ 
 
 line by 21, its mass by m, the dis- ~~G jf 
 
 tance GE by x, and the length *"" JcT" 1 " 
 
 of the element by dx. From the Fi s- 19 - 
 principle of homogeneity, we have, 
 
 21 : dx : : m : dm ; /. dm = dx. 
 
 Substituting in (1), and integrating from x = I to 
 x = + I, we have, 
 
 K m-\ .'. K' = m ( + d* ) (3) 
 
 <J \O / 
 
 These formulas are entirely independent of the breadth 
 of AB in the direction of the axis CD ; they hold good, 
 therefore, when the filament is replaced by the rectangle 
 EF 9 the axis being parallel to one of its ends. In this 
 case m is the mass of the rectangle ; 21, its length ; and d, 
 the distance of the axis from the centre of gravity of the 
 rectangle. 
 
178 
 
 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Moment of Inertia of a Circle. 
 
 90. First) let the axis be taken to coincide with one of 
 the diameters. Let ACB represent the circle, AB the 
 axis, and C'D' an element parallel to A 
 
 the axis. Denote 00 by r, OE by x, 
 EF by dx, C'D' by 2y, and the mass 
 of the circle by m. Then, because the 
 circle is homogeneous, we have, 
 
 BT 
 
 : 2ydx : : m : dm ; 
 
 = ^dx = 
 
 -TIT 2 
 
 Substituting in (1), 
 
 f(r* - 
 *J 
 
 Keducing by Formulas A and B, integrating by (20), 
 and taking the integral between the limits x = r and 
 r. = + r, we find, 
 
 (4) 
 
 Secondly, let the axis be taken through the centre and 
 perpendicular to the plane of the circle. Let KL be an 
 elementary ring, whose radius is x, and 
 whose breadth is dx ; then will its area 
 be Zifxdx, and from the principle, that the / 
 masses are proportional to the volumes, 
 we have, 
 
 m : dm ; .*. dm = j 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 
 
 Substituting in (1), and integrating from x = to x = r, 
 we have, 
 
 (5) 
 
 Thirdly, to find the moment of inertia of a circular 
 ring with respect to an axis perpendicular to its plane. 
 Let m denote the mass of the ring, r and r ' 
 its extreme radii ; 
 
 Then, 7t(r 2 r' 2 ) : %nxdx ::m: dm ; 
 
 .\dm = ^ jj dx. 
 
 Substituting in (1) and integrating from 
 x = r' to x = r, we have 
 
 Fig. 22. 
 
 Formulas (5) and (6) are independent of the thickness 
 of the plate ; hence, they will be true whatever that thick- 
 ness may be. Hence, they hold good for a solid and hollow 
 cylinder, m being taken to represent the mass of the 
 cylinder. 
 
 Moment of Inertia of a Cylinder with respect to an Axis 
 perpendicular to the Axis of the Cylinder. 
 
 91. Let the axis be taken through the centre of gravity 
 of the cylinder, and let EF be an element perpendicular 
 to the axis of the cylinder. Denote the 
 length of the cylinder by 21, its radius 
 by r, its mass by m, the distance of EF 
 from the axis by x, and the thickness 
 by dx. Then, as before, we have, 
 
 dx : : m : dm ; 
 
 7 m 
 dm = r 
 
180 
 
 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 The moment of inertia of this element is given by For- 
 mula (4) ; but this is the differential of the moment of 
 inertia of the entire cylinder; hence, substituting dm for 
 m, and x for d, in (4), we have, 
 
 Integrating from I to + Z, we have, 
 
 ( 7) 
 
 Moment of Inertia of a Sphere. 
 
 92. Let the axis pass through the centre of a sphere. 
 Let C'D' be an elementary segment perpendicular to 
 the axis, DC, whose volume is *y 2 dx 
 = *(r 2 x 2 )dx; its mass is found -- r ^- c ' 
 
 from the proportion, 
 
 - 
 
 : if(r 2 x 2 )dx : : m : dm; 
 
 .: dm 
 
 3m 
 
 (r 2 -x 2 )dx. 
 
 Substituting this value of dm for m in equation (5), and 
 making r in that equation equal to y, or to Vr 2 x 2 , we 
 have, for the differential of the moment of inertia, 
 
 ^ 
 
 =(r 2 -x*) 2 dx. 
 
 Integrating between the limits x = r, and x = + r, we 
 have, 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 181 
 
 III. MOTION OF A MATERIAL POINT. 
 
 General Formulas. 
 
 93. Uniform, motion is that in which the moving point 
 passes over equal spaces in equal times ; variable motion 
 is that in which the moving point passes over unequal 
 spaces in equal times. The velocity of a point is its rate 
 of motion. The acceleration due to a force is the rate of 
 change that it produces in the velocity of a point. When 
 a force acts to increase the velocity, the acceleration is 
 positive) when it acts to diminish the velocity, the accelera- 
 tion is negative, and conversely. 
 
 Let us denote the mass of a material point by m, its 
 velocity at any time t, by v, the space moved over at the 
 time t, by s, and the acceleration due to the moving force 
 by <p. 
 
 When the motion is uniform, the velocity is constant, and 
 its measure is the space passed over in any time divided by 
 that time ; but we may, in all cases, regard the motion as 
 uniform for an infinitely small time dt ; denoting the 
 space described in that time by ds 9 we have, 
 
 ds 
 
 When the velocity varies uniformly the acceleration is 
 constant, and we take for its measure the change of 
 velocity in any time divided by that time; but we may, in 
 all cases, regard the velocity as varying uniformly for an 
 infinitely small time dt ; denoting the change of velocity 
 in that time by dv, we have, 
 
182 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 In the discussion of motion it is customary to regard the 
 time as the independent variable. Differentiating (1), 
 under that supposition, we find, 
 
 substituting this in (2), we have, 
 
 Equations (1), (2), and (3) are fundamental, and from 
 them we may deduce many laws of motion. If we multi- 
 ply both members of (3) by m, we have, 
 
 cl 2 s p _ d 2 s 
 
 In (4), F is the moving force. It will often be conve- 
 nient to regard the mass of the material point as the unit 
 of mass, in which case, we have, m = 1. 
 
 Uniformly Varied Motion. 
 
 94. Uniformly varied motion is that in which the ve- 
 locity increases, or diminishes, uniformly. In the former 
 case the motion is uniformly accelerated, in the latter it is 
 uniformly retarded, in both the acceleration is constant. 
 Denoting the constant value of <p by g, substituting in (3), 
 multiplying both meml jrs by dt, and integrating, we 
 have, 
 
 ^ = fff. + C; or, v = gt f C (5) 
 
 Multiplying again by dt, and integrating, we find, 
 s = \gt* + Ct + C 1 (6) 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 183 
 
 The constant, (7, is what v becomes when t = ; this is 
 called the initial velocity, and may be denoted by v'. The 
 constant, 0', is what s becomes when t = ; this is called 
 the initial space, and may be denoted by s'. Making these 
 substitutions in (5) and (6), we have, 
 
 v = v'+fft (7) 
 
 * = s' 4- v't + \gt* (8) 
 
 Equations (7) and (8) enable us to discuss all the cir- 
 cumstances of uniformly varied motion (see Mechanics, 
 Arts. 103 to 108). If g represent the force of gravity, and 
 v' and s' be each equal to 0, (7) and (8) will express the 
 laws of motion when a body falls from rest under the in- 
 fluence of gravity, regarded as a constant force. Under 
 this supposition they become, 
 
 *=fft (9) 
 
 s = W (10) 
 
 That is, the velocities generated are proportional to tne 
 times, and the spaces fallen through are proportional to 
 the squares of the times. 
 
 Bodies Falling under the Influence of Gravity, regarded as 
 Variable. 
 
 95. In accordance with the Newtonian law, the attrac- 
 tion exerted by the earth on a body at different distances 
 varies inversely as the squares of their distances. Denoting 
 the radius of the earth, supposed a sphere, by r, the force 
 of gravity at the surface by g, any distance from the cen- 
 tre, greater than r, by s, and the force of gravity at that 
 distance by <p, we have, 
 
 3 * ~ 
 
184 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Substituting this value of 9 in (3), and at the same time 
 making it negative, because it acts in the direction of s 
 negative, we have, 
 
 Multiplying by 2ds, and integrating both members, we 
 have, 
 
 ds* 2r z Zr* 
 
 If we make v = 0, when s = li, we have, 
 
 aid, '=2<rr'j- ..... (13) 
 
 Equation (13) gives the velocity generated whilst the 
 body is falling from the height li to the height s. If we 
 make h co , and s = r, (13) becomes, 
 
 v* = 2gr; .-. v fyr ..... (14) 
 
 In this equation the resistance of the air is not con- 
 sidered. 
 
 If in (14) we make g = 32.088 feet, and r 20923590 
 feet, their equatorial values, we find, 
 
 v 3GG44 feet, or nearly 1 miles per second. 
 
 Equation (14) enables us to compute the velocity acquired 
 by a body in falling from an infinite distance to the sun. 
 If we make g = 890.16 feet, and r = 430854.5 miles, which 
 are their values corresponding to the sun, we find, 
 
 v = 381 miles per second. 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 185 
 
 If we make li equal to the distance of Neptune, and s 
 equal to the sun's radius in (13), we find the velocity that 
 a body would acquire in falling from Neptune to the sun, 
 under the influence of the sun's attraction. 
 
 To find the time required for a body to fall through any 
 
 ds 
 
 space, substitute for v in (13), and solve the results with 
 cct 
 
 respect to dt; this gives, 
 
 ^ = V^'7^ = ~/^'vlb- (15) 
 
 The negative sign is taken because s decreases as t in- 
 creases. Reducing (15) by Formula E, and integrating 
 by Formula (20), we find, 
 
 If t when s = h, we have, 
 
 This, in (16), gives, 
 
 I ftversin- 1 J + fr*] . . . (17) 
 Making s = r in (17), we find, 
 
 IT, [(/<< - r-)* - I Avorsin- 1 }: + ^] . . . (18) 
 
 Which gives the time required for a body to fall from a 
 distance h, to the surface of the sun. 
 
186 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Bodies Palling under the Influence of a Force that vaiies as 
 the Distance. 
 
 96. It will be shown hereafter, that if an opening were 
 made along one of the diameters of the earth, and a body 
 permitted to fall through it, the body would be urged 
 toward the centre by a force varying as the distance from 
 the centre, provided the earth were homogeneous. As- 
 suming that principle, and denoting the force at the sur- 
 face by g, the radius being r, and the force at the distance, 
 x, from the centre by <p, we have, 
 
 r : s : : g : <p ; 
 
 Substituting this value of <p in (3), and at the same time 
 giving it the minus sign, because it acts in the direction 
 of s negative, we have, 
 
 Multiplying by 2ds, and integrating, 
 
 |! = _i! + (7;oj ; )V . = (7-?,.. 
 
 dt z r r 
 
 Making v 0, when s = r, we have, C ^ r 2 ; hence, 
 
 - = -,). -.(19) 
 cit* r 
 
 If s = 0, we find v = Vgr, which is the maximum velocity. 
 It is eqjal to the entire velocity generated by a body fall- 
 ing from an infinite distance to the surface of the earth 
 
 divided by A/2. If the body pass the centre, s becomes 
 amative, and we find the same values for v at equal dis- 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 18? 
 
 tances from the centre, whether s be positive or negative. 
 When s becomes equal to r, v reduces to 0, and the 
 body then falls toward the centre again, and so on con- 
 tinually. 
 
 Let us suppose A'C' to be the diameter along which the 
 body oscillates, and at the time the body starts from A' 
 let a second body start from the same 
 point and move around the semi-cir- 
 cumference, A' MO', with a constant 
 velocity equal to *fgr. At any point, 
 M, let this velocity be resolved into 
 two components, MQ and MN, the 
 former perpendicular and the latter 
 parallel to A'C'. The latter component will be equal to 
 y multiplied by cosTMN, or its equal, cosB'MII' ; but 
 
 COB&MH' = ^TJ,; denoting B'H' by s, whence H'M 
 we have, cosB'MH' 
 
 = ; hence, NN A/ ^- . (r 2 s*)* : but this 
 
 r I/ r 
 
 is equal to the velocity of the oscillating point when at IT. 
 Hence, the velocity of the vibrating point is everywhere 
 equal to the parallel component of the velocity of the 
 revolving point; they will, therefore, come together at the 
 points A and 6 r/ , and the position of the vibrating point 
 will always be found by projecting the corresponding posi- 
 tion of the revolving point on the path of the former. To 
 find the time for a complete vibration from A' to C", solve 
 (19) with respect to dt, whence, 
 
 9 Vr*- 
 
 ( 20 ) 
 
188 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCL'LUS. 
 
 The negative sign is used because t is a decreasing func- 
 tion of s. Integrating (20) between the limits s = r and 
 s = r, we find. 
 
 t" = 
 
 This, we shall see hereafter, is the time of vibration of a 
 simple pendulum whose length is r. 
 
 The time maybe found otherwise, as follows: The space 
 passed over by the revolving point is ir-ry dividing this by 
 the velocity, V]/r, we have, 
 
 t T 
 
 The species of vibratory motion just discussed is some- 
 times called harmonic, being the same as that of a point 
 of a vibrating chord or spring. 
 
 Vibration of a Particle of an Elastic Medium. 
 
 97. It is assumed that if a particle of an elastic medium 
 be slightly disturbed from its place of rest, and then aban- 
 doned, it will be urged back by a force that varies directly 
 as the distance of the particle from its position of equilib- 
 rium ; on reaching this position, the particle, by virtue of 
 its inertia, will pass to the other side, again to be urged 
 back, and so on. 
 
 Let us denote the displacement, at any time t, by s, and 
 the acceleration due to the restoring force by <p ; then, from 
 the law of force, we have, <p = n*s, in which n is constant 
 for the same medium, under the same circumstances of 
 density, pressure, etc. Substituting for 9 its value from 
 Equation (3), and prefixing the negative sign, because it 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 189 
 
 acts in a direction contrary to that in which s is estimated, 
 we have, 
 
 Multiplying by 2ds, and integrating, we have, 
 
 -j = n*** + C=-V* ..... (23) 
 
 The Telocity is when the particle is at the greatest 
 distance from the position of equilibrium; denoting this 
 value of s by a, we have, 
 
 n*a* + (7=0; .-. C= -n*a*, 
 which, in (23), gives, 
 
 ^ = n*(a* - *) ; or, ndt = J^= ..... (24) 
 dt* Vfl 2 - s 2 
 
 Integrating (24), we have. 
 
 nt + G' = sin" 1 - ..... (25) 
 
 Taking the sines of both members, and reducing, we have, 
 s = asui(nt + C) ..... (26) 
 
 If we make t = 0, when s = 0, we have (7 = 0, ana Equa- 
 tion (2G) becomes, 
 
 s = a sm(nt) ..... (27) 
 
 If (25) be taken between the limits a and + a, we find 
 for the time of a single vibration, denoted by \T, 
 
190 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Substituting this in (27), we have, finally, 
 
 n n O1 ' 11 / / I /OC\ 
 
 8 asiu\^~tj (28) 
 
 in which T is the time of a double vibration. 
 Solving (24), we have, 
 
 -1* (29) 
 
 Substituting for s, in (29), its value from (28), we find, 
 
 v = nA/ a* a 2 siii 2 f~tj = naA/1 sin 2 f> 
 
 Whence, we have, 
 
 v = nacos(~t\ (30) 
 
 This equation is used in discussing the laws of light, 
 and in many other cases. 
 
 Curvilinear Motion of a Point. 
 
 98. A point cannot move in a curve except under the 
 action of an incessant force, whose direction is inclined to 
 the direction of the motion. This force is called the de- 
 flecting force, and can be resolved into two components, 
 one in the direction of the motion, and the other at right 
 angles to it. The former acts simply to increase or di- 
 minish the velocity, and is called the tangential force ; the 
 latter acts to turn the point from its rectilinear direc- 
 tion, and being directed toward the centre of curvature 
 is called the centripetal force. The resistance offered by 
 the point to the centripetal force, in consequence of its 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 191 
 
 inertia, is equal and directly opposed to the centripetal 
 force, and is called the centrifugal force. 
 
 To find expressions for the tangential and centripetal 
 forces, let the acceleration due to the deflecting force in the 
 direction of the axis of x, at any 
 time t } be denoted by JT, and the 
 acceleration in the direction of 
 the axis of y by Y. Let these be 
 resolved into components acting 
 tangentially and normally. The 
 algebraic sum of the tangential 
 components is the tangential accel- 
 eration denoted by T, and the 
 algebraic sum of the normal components is the centripetal 
 acceleration denoted by JV. Assuming the notation of the 
 figure, we have, 
 
 T = JT 
 
 N JTsind I"cos0. 
 But from Articles (93) and (5), we have, 
 
 and, 
 
 - 
 
 dt* 
 
 dt* 
 
 dx dy 
 
 cosd = r ; smd = -/-. 
 ds d 
 
 Substituting in the preceding equations, and reducing oil 
 the supposition that t is the independent variable, and bv 
 means of Formula (3), Art. (38), we have, 
 
 _ _ d~x dx d 2 y dy 
 ~ ~di* ' T* + W ' ts 
 
 (31) 
 
192 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 -_ _ d*xdy d*ydx 
 dt* . ds 
 
 ds z d*ydx d*xdy __ v* 
 ~di*'~ ~ds*~ ~ ~R 
 
 But the centripetal acceleration is equal and directly op- 
 posed to the centrifugal acceleration. Denoting the lattei 
 by f, we have, 
 
 v 2 
 
 IVom (31) we see that the tangential force is independ 
 ent of the centripetal force, and from (32) we see that the 
 acceleration due to the centrifugal force at any point of the 
 trajectory, is equal to the square of the velocity divided by 
 the radius of curvature at that point. 
 
 Velocity of a Point rolling down a Curve in a Vertical Plane. 
 
 90. Let a point roll down a curve, situated in a vertical 
 plane, under the influence of gravity regarded as constant. 
 Let the origin of co-ordinates be taken at the starting 
 point, and let distances downward be positive. At any 
 point of the curve, whose ordinate is y, the force of gravity 
 being denoted by g, we have, for the tangential component 
 
 of gravity, #sin<3, or, g -f ; placing this equal to its value, 
 as 
 
 equation (31), we have, 
 
 dij d z s 
 
 Integrating and reducing, remembering that the constant 
 ife under the particular hypothesis, we have, 
 
 2 is* ; or? v = 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 193 
 
 The second member of (1) is the velocity due to the 
 height y. Hence, the velocity generated by a body rolling 
 down a curve, gravity being constant, is equal to that gen- 
 erated by falling freely through the same vertical height. 
 
 This principle is true so long as g is constant. But g 
 may be regarded as constant from element to element, no 
 matter what may be the law of variation. Hence, if a body 
 fall toward the sun, or earth, on a spiral line, the ultimate 
 velocity will be the same as though it had fallen on a right 
 line toward the centre of the attracting body. The direc- 
 tion of the motion, however, is not the same, for in the 
 former case it is tangential to the trajectory pursued, and 
 in the latter case it is normal to the attracting body. 
 
 The Simple Pendulum. 
 
 100. A simple pendulum is a material point suspended 
 from a horizontal axis, by a line without weight, and free 
 to vibrate about that axis. 
 
 Let ABC be the arc through which the vibration takes 
 place, and denote its radius by I. The angle CD A is the 
 amplitude of vibration ; half this angle, 
 ADB, denoted by a, is the angle of 
 deviation; and I is tlie length of tlie 
 pendulum. If the point start from 
 rest, at A, it will, on reaching any 
 point, //, of its path, have a velocity, v, 
 due to the height EK, denoted by y. 
 Hence, 
 
 v = 
 
 If we denote the angle HDB by 6, we have DK ' = 7cos0; 
 we also have DE=lcosa and since y is equal to DKDE, 
 we have, 
 
 y = J(cos0 - COSa), 
 
 
194 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 which, being substituted in the preceding formula, 
 gives, 
 
 v = A2#/(cos4 cosa). 
 
 Again, denoting the angular velocity at the time i by <p, 
 
 id rememberi 
 the pendulum, 
 
 and remembering that 9 = , we have, for the velocity of 
 
 Cit 
 
 Equating the two values of v, and reducing, we. have, 
 
 cosa 
 
 Developing cos$ and cosa by McLaurin's Formula, we have, 
 
 ^ -?+'-** 
 
 a 3 * 
 ~ 2~ f 24 ~ 
 
 If we suppose the amplitude to be small, we may neglect 
 all the terms after the second ; doing so, and substituting 
 in (31), we have, 
 
 Integrating between the limits & == a, and A = + a } we 
 find, 
 
 t = 
 
 which is the formula for the time of vibration of a 
 pendulum. 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 195 
 
 Attraction of Homogeneous Spheres. 
 
 101. The Newtonian Law of universal gravitation may 
 be expressed as follows, viz. : every particle of matter 
 attracts every other particle, with a force that varies 
 directly as the mass of the attracting particle, and inversely 
 as the square of the distance between the particles. To 
 apply this law to the case of homogeneous spheres, let us 
 first consider the action of a spherical shell, of infinitesimal 
 thickness, on a material point within it. 
 
 Let D be the material point, APB a great circle through 
 it, and let the diameter ADB be taken as the axis of x. 
 If the circle be revolved 
 about AB, its circum- 
 ference will generate a 
 spherical shell, and any 
 element of the circnmfer- 
 ence, as P, will generate 
 an elementary zone whose 
 altitude is dx. For any 
 point of this zone, as P, 
 there, is another point, P', 
 
 symmetrical with it, and the resultant action of these points 
 on D is directed along AB, and is equal to the sum of the 
 forces into the cosine of the angle BDP. Hence, the re- 
 sultant attraction of the entire zone is directed along AB, 
 and is equal to the sum of the attractions of all its particles 
 into the cosine of the angle BDP. To find an expression 
 for this resultant, denote CP by r, CD by a, DP by z, 
 and C7? by x. Because the shell is infinitesimal in thick- 
 ness and homogeneous, the mass of the zone, is to the mass 
 of the shell, as dx, the altitude of the zone, is to 2r, the 
 altitude of the shell. Hence, if the mass of the shcil be 
 
*9G DIFFERENTIAL AXD INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 denoted by m, the mass of the zone will be denoced by 
 - --. If the force exerted by the unit of muss at the unit 
 
 of distance be taken as the unit of force, the attraction 
 exerted by all the particles of the zone on the point D will 
 
 be equal to ~~ . , and the resultant action on D, in the 
 
 direction of AB, denoted by df, will be given by the equa- 
 tion, 
 
 
 
 From the triangle, PCD, we have, 
 DP* = z* = r 2 + 2 - 2ax = r 2 - a z - 2a(x - ), 
 and from the triangle, EDP, we have, 
 
 cos ED P = ^-^.. 
 
 z 
 
 Substituting in (1), remembering that dx equals d(x rt), 
 we have, 
 
 m . (x - a] d(x - a) . 
 
 f= Wr' --- -- 5 ..... ( ' 
 
 [ r _ a * - 2a(x - )] 
 
 Regarding (x a) as a single variable, reducing by For- 
 mula A, and integrating by Formula (29), we find, 
 
 _ a z _ 2a(x - a] 
 
 + 
 
 Taking the integral from x r to x .-= + r, we have, 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASfKOXOMY. 197 
 
 Hence, the effect of the attraction of the shell on any 
 point within it is null. If a sphere be described about 
 as a centre with a radius equal to #, we may call that paifc 
 which lies between it and the surface of the given sphere 
 the exterior sJicU, and the sphere itself may be called the 
 nucleus. From what precedes, we infer that any point 
 within a homogeneous sphere is acted on by the sphere 
 precisely as though the exterior shell did not exist. Hence, 
 a point at the centre of a sphere is not affected by the 
 attraction of the sphere. 
 
 If the point D' be taken without the shell, we have, 
 
 jyp 2 = z* = r* + fl 2 + 2ax = r 2 - a n + 2a(x + a), 
 and from the triangle, ED'P, we have, 
 
 cosED'P = ^f . 
 z 
 
 Substituting in (1), we have, 
 
 1 [r 2 - cr + 2a(x + a)]" 2 ' 
 Reducing and integrating as before, we find, 
 
 - _ m ( . x -f a 
 
 r ( a\r z a z + %a(x + a^* 
 
 )T 
 
 ,2 .. 
 
 + C. 
 
 -a 8 -f 2a 
 
 Taking the integral between the -limits x = r and 
 = + ?, we have, when a > r 
 
198 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 But m is the mass of the shell, and a is the distance of D 
 from the centre; hence, the shell attracts a particle with- 
 out it as though its entire mass were concentrated at its 
 centre. 
 
 A homogeneous sphere may be regarded as made np of 
 spherical shells; hence, a sphere attracts any point without 
 it, as though the mass of the sphere were concentrated at its 
 centre. The same is true of a sphere made up of homoge- 
 neous strata, which vary in density in passing from the 
 surface to the centre. It is to be inferred that two homo- 
 geneous spheres, or two spheres made up of homogeneous 
 strata, attract each other as though both were concentrated 
 at their centres. 
 
 If an opening were made from the surface to the centre 
 of the earth, supposed homogeneous, and a body were to 
 move along it under the earth's attraction, it would every- 
 where be urged on by a force varying diretily as the dis- 
 tance of the body from the centre. For, denote the dis- 
 tance of the body from the centre at any instant by x. 
 The body will only be acted on by the nucleus whose radius 
 is x. If we take r to represent the radius of the earth, 
 and remember that the masses are proportional to these 
 volumes, we have, 
 
 4 4 
 
 M : m : : ^vr 3 : ^*x 3 : : r 3 : x 3 . 
 o o 
 
 Denoting the force of attraction at the surface by g, and 
 the force of attraction at the point whose distance from 
 the centre is x by/, we have, from the Newtonian law, 
 
 Hence, the proposition is proved. (See Art. 96.) 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRO N'O.MV. 199 
 
 Orbital Motion. 
 
 102. If a moving point, P 9 be continually acted on by a 
 deflecting force directed toward a fixed centre, it will de- 
 scribe a line or path, called an orbit. If the moving point 
 be undisturbed by the action of any other force, the orbit 
 will lie in a plane passing through the fixed centre and an 
 element of the curve. Let 
 this plane be taken as the 
 co-ordinate plane, let the 
 fixed point be the origin, 
 and let the orbit be repre- 
 sented by APB. 
 
 Denote the acceleration 
 due to the deflecting force 
 at any time t by/, its in- 
 
 Fig. 29. 
 
 clination to the axis by 9, and its components in the direc- 
 tions of the co-ordinate axes by A" and Y. 
 From the figure, we have, 
 
 X ~/cos?, and Y= /ship 
 
 If we regard / as the independent variable, dx and dy will 
 both be variable, and from Equation (3), Art 93, we have, 
 
 If we denote the co-ordinates of P by x and y, and ita 
 radius vector FP by r, we have, from the figure, 
 
 x . ii 
 cosp = -, sm<p = -; 
 
 T T 
 
 and 
 
 + y* r 2 ; .-. xdx + ydy = rdr. 
 
200 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS* 
 
 Substituting in (1), we have, 
 
 Multiplying the first of Equations (2) by y, the second by 
 x } and subtracting the former from the latter, we have, 
 
 xd*y ycPx d (xdy ydx) A 
 
 w-V=' or M J =o-----(3) 
 
 Multiplying the first by dx, the second by dy, adding the 
 resulting equations and reducing, we have, 
 
 dxd*x dyd z y _ 4 .xdx + ydy _ fl 
 ~W ~^dtT ~J F" ~ J 
 
 Integrating (3) and (4), Art. 77, we have, 
 
 and 
 
 1 /7r 2 4- (In* {* 
 
 I^TP* +:*--/>*' 
 
 or, 
 
 ^ + 2 ffdr = C" (6) 
 
 Equations (5) and (G) make known the circumstances 
 of motion when the value of/ is given. It is found con- 
 venient to transform them to a system of polar co-o Mi nates, 
 whose pole is F, and whose initial line is FX. The for* 
 mulas for transformation are 
 
 x rcoep, and y = rsin<p (7) 
 
 Hence, by differentiating, we have, 
 du dr . dq> 
 
 and 
 
 dx dr . dq> , n * 
 
 = cosf-win^ (9) 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 201 
 
 \V*e also, have, Art. (53), 
 
 <&* = r*dq>* + dr* ...... (10) 
 
 Substituting in (5), and reducing by the relations, 
 
 %2 _j_ 2/2 
 
 aasiiKp 3, cos? = 0, and xcos? + f/sincp = --- f, 
 we have, 
 
 From equation (6), we have, 
 
 But, from (11), we have, 
 
 ,, r z dq> 
 dt = ~C^ 
 
 and this, in (12), gives, 
 
 Equations (11) and (13) are the equations required. 
 Multiplying (11) by dt, and integrating, we have, 
 
 = Ct + C'" (14) 
 
 But, by Art. 53, r z dy is twice the elementary area swept 
 over by the radius vector; hence, the first member of (14) 
 is an expression for twice the area swept over by the radiua 
 VHctor up to the time t. If we suppose the area to bo 
 reckoned from the initial line FX, and at the same time 
 
 9* 
 
202 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 suppose t = 0, we have C'" = 0. Substituting this in (14), 
 and in the resulting equation making t = I, we find 
 C equal to twice the area swept over in the first unit of 
 time ; denoting the area described in the unit of time bv 
 A, we have, C 2 A, and consequently, 
 
 = 2At (15) 
 
 From Equation (15) we infer that the areas described by 
 elae radius vector are proportional to the times of descrip- 
 tion, and this without reference to the nature of the de- 
 flecting force. 
 
 To find the equation of the orbit, let us assume as M 
 particular case, the Newtonian law of universal gravita- 
 tion. .Denoting the force exerted by the central body at a 
 unit's distance by k, we have, for the attraction at the 
 distance r, 
 
 Making r = -, whence dr = -- -, and substituting for (j 
 *nd/ their values in (13), we have, 
 
 or, 
 
 du 2 2k 
 
 _ +w2= __ 
 
 (17) 
 
 V 
 
 To find the value of <7 V , let ~ = 0, when r = r', or 
 
 op 
 
 u = u r . But when - = 0, we also have - T = 0, that is. 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 203 
 
 the radius vector is perpendicular to the arc. If we denote 
 the corresponding velocity by v', we have, 
 
 and, consequently, 
 
 2k 2k 
 
 A* U ~ v'*r' 3 ' 
 Making these substitutions in (18), we find, 
 
 fiV _ %k 
 
 775 ~~ _./-/ 
 
 Denoting this value of O y by S, and solving Equation (18), 
 we have, 
 
 du* 2k \ k* 
 
 du* ( 2k \ 
 
 W = 8 ' -QI*) = 
 
 Solving with reference to <p, and taking the negative sign 
 of the radical, we have, 
 
 VP 2 (u q) z vp z (u q) 2 
 
 Integrating, we have, 
 
 9 - a = cos- 1 -^^ ..... (20) 
 
 In which a is an arbitrary constant. If we suppose 
 9 0, when v = v\ r = r r , and u = u', the corresponding 
 value of a is the angular distance from the initial line to 
 the radius vector whose direction is perpendicular to the 
 element of the curve. 
 
204: DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Taking the cosines of both members of (20), we have, 
 
 i = cos(<p a), or, u = q + jocos(<p a) 
 and finally replacing u by its value, and solving, we have, 
 
 r = 
 
 q + jt?cos(<p a) k + l6SA* + k 2 X cos(9 a) 
 
 Equation (21) is the polar equation of a conic section. 
 Hence, the orbit of a particle about a central attracting 
 body is one of the conic sections. If the orbit is a closed 
 curve, it must be an ellipse. This corresponds to the case 
 of a planet revolving about the sun, or to that of a satellite 
 revolving about its primary. 
 
 Law of Force. 
 
 103. If the orbit of a revolving particle be an ellipse, it 
 must be attracted to the focal point by a force that 
 varies inversely as the square of the distance. 
 
 The polar equation of an ellipse is 
 
 . 
 
 1 4- ecos(<p a) 
 
 in which a is the semi- transverse axis, e is the eccentricity, 
 a is the angular distance from the fixed line to the radius 
 vector drawn to the nearest vertex, or the longitude of the 
 perihelion in the case of a planetary orbit. The angle, 
 p a, is the angle that is called in astronomy the true 
 anomaly. 
 Putting r = - , in (1), we get, 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 205 
 
 Differentiating twice, with respect to <p, we find, 
 
 du _ esin(cp a) . 
 
 cfy ~ " ~a(l - e z ) 
 and, 
 
 d z u __ e cos (9 a) . 
 
 ~ 2 
 
 Adding (2) and (4), we have, 
 d * u x 
 
 /"\ 
 
 Resuming equation (13) of the last article, replacing r by 
 its value, -, and dr 
 
 '1C 
 
 reducing, we have, 
 
 its value, -, and dr by its value, -- r , differentiating and 
 
 '1C U 
 
 Combining (5) and (G), and solving with respect to /, we 
 Iiave, 
 
 C*u* C* 1_ 
 
 / - a (l - e*)' r/ ~ a(l - e*) ' r* ' 
 
 Hence, f varies inversely as the square of r, which was to 
 be shown. 
 
 Note on the Methods of the Calculus. 
 
 104. All the rules and principles of the Calculus, in the. 
 present treatise, have been deduced in accordance with the 
 method of infinitesimals, as explained in Articles 6 and 7. 
 They might also have been deduced by the method of limits. 
 It remains to be shown that the results obtained by these 
 two methods are always identically the same. 
 
206 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 To explain the method of limits, let us denote any func- 
 tion of x by y ; that is, let us assume the equation, 
 
 y =/(*) (i) 
 
 If we increase x by a variable increment h, and denote the 
 corresponding value of?/ by y', we have, 
 
 y'=f(x + h) (2) 
 
 It is shown in Courteuay's Calculus, Article 4, that so long 
 as x retains its general value, the new state of the function 
 can be expressed by the formula, 
 
 y' =f(x + U) =f(x) + Ah + Bh* + Ch* + etc. . . (3) 
 
 in which A, B, C, etc., depend on x, but are independent 
 of h. If we subtract (1) from (3), member from member, 
 we have, 
 
 y' -y = Ah + 3h* + (etc.) h 3 (4) 
 
 Dividing both members of (4) by h, we have, 
 
 ^-^ = A + Bh + (etc.) h* (5) 
 
 The first member of (5) is a symbol to express the ratio 
 of the increment of the variable) to the corresponding incre- 
 ment of the function } and the second member is the value 
 of that ratio. 
 
 It is shown in Algebra, that in an expression like the 
 second member of equation (5), it is always possible to 
 give to h a value small enough to make the first term 
 numerically greater than the algebraic sum of all the 
 others. If we assign such a value to h) and then suppose 
 h to go on diminishing, the second member will contin- 
 ually approach A, and when h becomes 0, the second mem- 
 
APPLICATIONS TO MECHANICS AND ASTRONOMY. 20? 
 
 ber will reduce to A. Hence, A is a quantity towan 1 . 
 
 i/' ii 
 which the ratio, j , approaches as li is diminished, but 
 
 beyond which it cannot pass; it is therefore the limit of 
 that ratio. This limit is the differential coefficient of y, 
 and, as may easily be seen, it is entirely independent of dx. 
 The product of this by the differential of the variable is 
 Hie differential of y. 
 
 We may, therefore, enunciate the method of limits as 
 follows: viz., Give to the independent variable a variable 
 increment, and find the corresponding state of the function ; 
 from this subtract the primitive state, and divide the dif- 
 ference by the variable increment; then pass to the limit 
 of the quotient by making the increment of the variable 
 equal to 0; the result is the differential coefficient of the 
 function; if this be multiplied by the differential of the 
 variable, the product is the differential of the function. 
 
 In the case assumed, we have, by this method, 
 
 J = A; .:dy=Adx (6) 
 
 If we make h dx, in Equation (4), dx being infinitely 
 small, the first member will be the. differential of y, and 
 all the terms of the second member after the first may be 
 neglected. Hence, by the method of infinitesimals, we 
 have, 
 
 dy = Adx; .: -^ = A. 
 dx 
 
 This result is the same as that obtained by the method of 
 limits. But, by hypothesis, y represents any function of 
 x; hence, in all cases, the differential coefficient is iden- 
 tically the same whether found by the method of limits or 
 by the method of infinitesimals. 
 
208 DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. 
 
 Erery function, regarded as a primitive, is connected 
 with some other function, regarded as a derivative, by the 
 law of differentiation. This derivative is the differential 
 coefficient of the primitive. The object of the differential 
 calculus is to find the derivative from its primitive; the 
 object of the integral calculus is to find the primitive from 
 its derivative; every application of the calculus depends 
 on one of these processes, or on some discussion growing 
 out of one, or the other. Now, because the primitive and 
 the derivative are independent of the differentials of both 
 function and variable, 4 the relation between them is, of 
 necessity, independent of the methods employed in estab- 
 lishing that relation. But it has been shown that the 
 same relation is found between these functions, whether 
 we employ the method of infinitesimals or the method of 
 limits. Hence, these methods, and the results obtained bj 
 them, are in all cases logically identical. 
 
BARNES'S POPULAR HISTORY 
 OF THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 By the author of Barnes's "Brief Histories for Schools." Complete in one superb 
 royal octavo volume of 800 pages. Illustrated with 320 wood engravings and 14 steel 
 plates, covering the period from the Discovery of America to the Accession of President 
 Arthur. 
 
 Part I. Colonial Settlement ; Exploration ; Conflict ; Manners ; Customs ; Educa- 
 tion ; Religion, &c., &c., until political differences with Great Britain threatened open 
 rupture. 
 
 Part II. Resistance to the Acts of Parliament ; Resentment of British Policy, and 
 the Succeeding War for American Independence. 
 
 Part III. From the Election of President Washington to that of President Lincoln, 
 with the expansion and growth of the Republic ; its Domestic Issues and its Foreign 
 Policy. 
 
 Part IV. The Civil War and the End of Slavery. 
 
 Part V. The New Era of the Restored Union ; with Measures of Reconstruction ; 
 the Decade of Centennial Jubilation, and the Accession of President Arthur to Office. 
 
 Appendix. Declaration of Independence ; The Constitution of the United States 
 and its Amendments ; Chronological Table and Index ; Illustrated History of the 
 Centennial Exhibition at Philadelphia. 
 
 The wood and steel engravings have been expressly chosen to illustrate the customs of 
 the periods reviewed in the text. Ancient houses of historic note, and many portraits of 
 early colonists, are thus preserved, while the elaborate plans of the Exposition of 1876 
 are fully given. The political characteristics of great leaders and great parties, which 
 had been shaped very largely by the issues which belonged to slavery and slave labor, 
 have been dealt with in so candid and impartial a manner as to meet the approval of 
 all sections of the American people. The progress of science, invention, literature, and 
 art is carefully noted, as well as that of the national physical growth, thus condensing 
 into one volume material which is distributed through several volumes in larger works. 
 Outline maps give the successive stages of national expansion , and special attention 
 has been given to those battles, by land and sea, which have marked the military growth 
 of the republic. JE1P" Specially valuable for reference in schools and households. 
 
 From Prof. F. F. BARROWS, Brown School, 
 
 Hartford, Conn. 
 
 " Barnes's Popular History has been in 
 onr reference library for two years. Its 
 concise and interesting presentation of 
 historical facts causes it to be so eagerly 
 read by our pupils, that we are obliged to 
 duplicate it to supply the demand for its 
 use." 
 
 From Hon. JOHN R. BUCK. 
 41 1 concur in the above." 
 
 From Hon. J. C. STOCK WELL. 
 "I heartily concur with Mr. Barrows in 
 the within commendation of ' Barnes's 
 Popular History,' as a very interesting and 
 instructiA'e book of reference." 
 From A. MORSE, Esq. 
 " I cordially concur in the above." 
 
 From Rev. WM. T. GAGE. 
 "I heartily agree with the opinions 
 above expressed." 
 
 From DAVID CRARY, Jr. 
 "The best work for the purpose pub- 
 lished." 
 
 From Prof. S. T. DUTTON, Superintendent 
 of Schools, New Haven, Conn. 
 
 " It seems to me to be one of the best 
 and most attractive works of the kind I 
 have ever seen, and it will be a decided 
 addition to the little libraries which we 
 have already started in our larger 
 schools." 
 
 From Prof. WM. MARTIN, of Beattystown. 
 
 N.J. 
 
 "This volume is well adapted to the 
 wants of the teacher. A concise, well- 
 arranged summary of events, and just the 
 supplement needed by every educator who 
 teaches American history." 
 
 From Prof. C. T. R. SMITH, Principal of 
 the Lansingburgh, N. F., Academy. 
 
 " In the spring I procured a copy of 
 ' Barnes's Popular History of the United 
 States,' and have used it daily since, in 
 preparing my work with my class in Ameri- 
 can history, with constantly increasing 
 admiration at the clearness, fairness, and 
 vividness of its style and judicious selec- 
 tion of matter." 
 
 Prices. Cloth, plain edge, $5.00; cloth, richly embossed, gilt, edge, 86.00; sheep, 
 marble edge, $7.00 ; half calf, $8.00 ; half morocco, $8.00 ; full inorocto, gilt, $10.00. 
 
SCHOOL AND COLLEGE TEXT-BOOKS. 
 The National Series Readers and Spellers, 
 
 THE NATIONAL READERS. 
 
 By PARKER and "WATSON. 
 
 No. I. National Primer 64 pp. 16 
 
 No. 2. National First Reader .... 128 " 16 
 No. 3. National Second Reader ... " 16 
 No. 4. National Third Reader . . . 288 " 12 
 No. 5. National Fourth Reader . . . 432 " 12 
 No. 6. National Fifth Reader. 600 " 12 
 
 National Elementary Speller .... 160 pp. 16 
 National Pronouncing Speller . . . . 188 " 12 
 
 THE INDEPENDENT READERS. 
 
 By J. MADISON WATSON. 
 
 The Independent First ( Pril n r ar y ) Reader . 80 pp. 16 
 
 The Independent Seoond Reader . . . 160 " 16 
 
 The Independent Third Reader . . . 240 " 16 
 
 The Independent Fourth Reader . . . 264 " 12 
 
 The Independent Fifth Reader . . . . 886 " 12 
 
 The Independent Sixth Reader . . . . 474 " '12 
 
 The Independent Complete Speller . . ' 162 " 16 
 
 The Independent Child's Speller (Script) 80 pp. 16 
 The Independent Youth's Speller (Script) 168 " 12 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 WATSON'S INDEPENDENT 
 READERS. 
 
 This Series is designed to meet a general demand for smaller and cheaper 
 books than the National Series proper, and to serve as well for intermediate 
 volumes of the National Readers in large graded schools requiring more books 
 than one ordinary series will supply. 
 
 Beauty. The most casual observer is at once impressed with the unpar- 
 alleled mechanical beauty of the Independent Readers. The Publishers be- 
 lieve that the aesthetic tastes of children may receive no small degree of 
 cultivation from their very earliest school-books, to say nothing of the impor- 
 tance of making study attractive by all such artificial aids that are legitimate. 
 In accordance with this view, not less than $25,000 was expended in their 
 preparation before publishing, with a result which entitles them to be con- 
 sidered "the perfection of common-school books." 
 
 Selections. They contain, of course, none but entirely new selections. 
 These are arranged according to a strictly progressive and novel method of 
 developing the elementary sounds in order in the lower numbers, and in all, 
 with a view to topics and general literary style. The mind is thus ledm fixed 
 channels to proficiency in every branch of good reading, and the evil results of 
 "scattering," as practised by most school-book authors, avoided. 
 
 The Illustrations, as may be inferred from what has been said, are ele- 
 gant beyond comparison. They are profuse in every number of the series, from 
 the lowest to the highest. This is the only series published of which this 
 is true. 
 
 The Type is semi-phonetic, the invention of Professor Watson. By it every 
 letter having more than one sound is clearly distinguished in all its variations 
 without in any way mutilating or disguising the normal form of the letter. 
 
 Elocution is taught by prefatory treatises of constantly advancing grade 
 and completeness in each volume, which are illustrated by woodcuts in the 
 lower books, and by blackboard diagrams in the higher. Professor Watson 
 is the first to introduce practical illustrations and blackboard diagrams for 
 teaching this branch. 
 
 Foot-Notes on every page afford all the incidental instruction which the 
 teacher is usually required to impart. Indices of words refer the pupil to the 
 place of their first use and definition. The biographies of authors and others 
 are in every sense excellent. 
 
 Economy. Although the number of pages in each volume is fixed at the 
 minimum, for the purpose recited above, the utmost amount of matter avail- 
 able without overcrowding is obtained -in the space. The pages %re much 
 wider and larger than those of any competitor and contain twenty per cent 
 more matter than any other series of the same type and number of pages. 
 
 All the Great Features. Besides the above all the popular features of 
 the National Readers are retained except the word-building system. The 
 latter gives place to an entirely new method of progressive development, based 
 upon some of the best features of the word system, phonetics, and object 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS, 
 
 PARKER & WATSON'S NATIONAL 
 READERS. 
 
 The salient features of these works which have combined to render them so popular 
 may be briefly recapitulated, as follows : 
 
 x. THE WORD-BUILDING SYSTEM. This famous progressive method 
 for young children originated and was copyrighted with these books. It constitutes a 
 process with which the beginner with words of one letter is gradually introduced to 
 additional lists formed by prefixing or affixing single letters, and is thus led almost 
 insensibly to the mastery of the more difficult constructions. This is one of the most 
 striking modern improvements in methods of teaching. 
 
 2. TREATMENT OF PRONUNCIATION. The wants of the youngest 
 scholars in this department are not overlooked. It may be said that from the first 
 lesson the student by this method need never be at a loss for a prompt and accurate 
 rendering of every word encountered. 
 
 3. ARTICULATION AND ORTHOEPY are considered of primary importance. 
 
 4. PUNCTUATION is inculcated by a series of interesting reading lessons, the 
 simple perusal of which suffices to fix its principles indelibly upon the mind. 
 
 5. ELOCUTION. Each of the higher Readers (3d, 4th, and 5th) contains elabo- 
 rate, scholarly, and thoroughly practical treatises on elocution. This feature alone lias 
 secured for the series many of its warmest friends. 
 
 6. THE SELECTIONS are the crowning glory of the series. Without excep- 
 tion it may be said that no volumes of the same size and character contain a collection 
 so diversified, judicious, and artistic as this. It embraces the choicest gems of Eng- 
 lish literature, so arranged as to afford the reader ample exercise in every department 
 of style. So acceptable has the taste of the authors in this department proved, not 
 only to the educational public but to the reading community at large, that thousands 
 of copies of the Fourth and Fifth Readers have found their way into public and private 
 libraries throughout the country, where they are in constant use as manuals of litera- 
 ture, for reference as well as perusal. 
 
 7. ARRANGEMENT. The exercises are so arranged as to present constantly 
 alternating practice in the different styles of composition, while observing a definite 
 plan of progression or gradation throughout the whole. In the higher books the 
 articles are placed in formal sections and classified topically, thus concentrating the 
 interest and inculcating a principle of association likely to prove valuable in subse- 
 quent general reading. 
 
 8. NOTES AND BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCHES. - These are full and ade- 
 quate to every want. The biographical sketches present in pleasing style the history of 
 every author laid under contribution. 
 
 9. ILLUSTRATIONS. These are plentiful, almost profuse, and of the highest 
 character or' art. They are found in every volume of the series as far as and including 
 the Third Reader. 
 
 ip. THE GRADATION is perfect. Each volume overlaps its companion pre- 
 ceding or Mlowing in the series, so that the scholar, in passing from one to another, is 
 only conscious, by the presence oi' the new book, of the transition. 
 
 11. THE PRICE is reasonable. The National Readers contain more matter than 
 any other series in the same number of volumes published. Considering their com- 
 pleteness and thoroughness, they are much the cheapest in the market. 
 
 12. BINDING. By the use of a material and process known only to themselves, 
 in common with all the publications of this house, the National Readers are warranted 
 to outlast any with which they may be compared, the ratio of relative durability 
 being in their favor as two to one. 
 
NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 SUPPLEMENTARY READING. 
 
 Monteith's Popular Science Reader. 
 
 James Monteith, author of Monteith's Geographies, has here presented a Supple- 
 mentary Reading Book expressly for the work of instruction in leading and science at 
 on and the same time. It presents a number of easy and interesting lessons on Natural 
 Science and Natural History, interspersed with appropriate selections in prose and 
 poetry from standard authors, with blackboard drawing and written exercises. It 
 serves to instil the noblest qualities of soul and mind, without rehearsing stories of 
 moral and mental depravity, as is too often done in juvenile books. The book is elabo- 
 rately illustrated with fine engravings, and brief notes at the foot of each page add to 
 the value and teachableness of the volume. 12mo, half bound, 360 pages. 
 
 The Standard Supplementary Readers. 
 
 The Standard Supplementary Readers (formerly Swinton's Supplementary Readtrs), 
 edited by William Swinton and George R. Cathcart, have been received with marked 
 favor in representative quarters from Maine to California. They comprise a series of 
 carefully graduated reading books, designed to connect with any series of school Readers. 
 They are attractive in appearance, are bound in cloth, and the first four books are 
 profusely illustrated by Fredericks, White, Dielman, Church, and others. The six books, 
 which are closely co-ordinated with the several Readers of any regular eeries, are 
 
 1. Easy Steps for Little Feet. Supplementary to First Reader. 
 
 In this book the attractive is the chief aim, and the pieces have been written and 
 chosen with special reference to the feelings and fancies of early childhood. 128 pages, 
 bound in cloth and profusely illustrated. 
 
 2. Golden Book of Choice Reading. Supplementary to Second 
 
 Reader. 
 
 This book represents a ;reat variety of pleasing and instructive reading, consisting of 
 child-lore and poetry, nobU* examples and attractive object-reading, written specially for it. 
 1U2 pages, cloth, with numerous illustrations 
 
 3 Book of Tales. Being School Readings Imaginative and Emotional. 
 
 Supplementary to Third Reader. 
 
 In this book the youthful taste for imaginative and emotional is fed with pure and noble 
 creations drawn from the literature of all nations. 272 pages, cloth. Fully illustrated. 
 
 4. Readings in Nature's Book. Supplementary to Fourth Reader. 
 This book contains a varied collection of charming readings in natural history and 
 
 botany, drawn from the works of the great modern naturalists and travellers. 352 pages,, 
 tloth. Fully illustrated. 
 
 5. Seven American Classics. 
 
 6. Seven British Classics. 
 
 The " Classics " are suitable for reading in advanced grades, and aim to instil a 
 taste for the higher literature, by the presentation of gems of British and American 
 authorship. 220 pages each, cloth. 
 
 8 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 Smith's Series. 
 
 Smith's Series supplies a Speller for every class in graded schools, and comprises 
 the most complete and excellent treatise on English Orthography and its companion 
 branches extant. 
 
 1. Smith's Little Speller. 
 
 First round in the ladder of learning. 
 
 2. Smith's Juvenile Definer. 
 
 Lessons composed of familiar words grouped with reference to similar significa- 
 tion or use, and correctly spelled, accented, and defined. 
 
 3. Smith's Grammar-School Speller. 
 
 Familiar words, grouped with reference to the sameness of sound of syllables dif- 
 ferently spelled. Also definitions, complete rules for spelling and formation of deriva- 
 tives, and exercises in false orthography. 
 
 4. Smith's Speller and Definer's Manual. 
 
 A complete School Dictionary, containing 14,000 wor**-, with various othei' useful 
 matter in the way of rules and exercises. 
 
 5. Smith's Etymology Small and Complete Editions. 
 
 The first and only Etymology to recognize the Anglo-Saxon our mother tongue; 
 containing also full lists of derivatives from the Latin, Greek, Gaelic, Swedish, Norman, 
 &c. , &c. ; being, in fact, a complete etymology of the language for schools. 
 
 Northend's Dictation Exercises. 
 
 Embracing valuable information on a- thousand topics, communicated in snch a 
 manner as at once to relieve the exercise of spelling of its usual tedium, and combine 
 it with instruction of a general character calculated to profit and amuse. 
 
 Phillip's Independent Writing Spellers 
 
 1. Primary. 2. Intermediate. 3. Advanced. 
 
 Unquestionably the best results can be attained in writing spelling exercises. This 
 series combines with written exercise a thorough and practical instruction in penman- 
 ship. Copies in capitals and small letters are set on every page. Spaces for twenty 
 words and definitions and errors are given in each lesson. In the advanced book there 
 is additional space for sentences. In practical life we spell only when we write. 
 
 Brown's Pencil Tablet for Written Spelling. 
 
 The cheapest i 
 64 lessons of 25 w 
 
 Pooler's Test Speller. 
 
 The best collection of " hard words " yet made. The more uncommon ones are fully 
 defined, and the whole are arrant/ed alphabetically for convenient reference. The book 
 is designed for Teachers' Institutes and " Spelling Schools," and is prepared by an 
 experienced and well-known conductor of Institutes. 
 
 Wright's Analytical Orthography. 
 
 This standard work is popular, because it teaches the elementary sounds ir a 
 plain and philosophical manner, and presents orthography and orthoepy in an easy. 
 uniform system of analysis or parsing. 
 
 The cheapest prepared pad of ruled blanks, with stiff board back, sufficient for 
 ords. 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY Continued. 
 
 Barber's Complete Writing Speller. 
 
 "The Student's Own Hand-Book of Orthography, Definitions, ana Sentences, con- 
 sisting of \\ritten Exercises in the Proper Spelling, Meaning, and Use of Words." 
 (Published 1873.) This differs from Sherwood's and other writing spellers in its more 
 comprehensive character. Its blanks arc. adapted to writing whole sentences instead 
 of detached words, with the proper divisions for numbering corrections, &c. Such 
 aids as this, like Watson's Child's Speller and Phillip's Writing Speller, find their 
 raison d'etre in the postulate that the art of correct spelling is dependent upon written, 
 and not upon spoken language, for its utility, if not for its very existence. Hence 
 the indirectness of purely oral instruction. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Smith's Complete Etymology. 
 Smith's Condensed Etymology. 
 
 Containing the Anglo-Saxon, French, Dutch, German, Welsh, Danish, Gothic, Swedish, 
 Gaelic, Italian, Latin, and Greek roots, and the English words derived therefrom 
 accurately spelled, accented, and defined. 
 
 From HON. JNO. G. McMvNN, late State 
 
 Superintendent of Wisconsin. 
 
 " I wish every teacher in the country 
 had a copy of this work." 
 
 From PROF. C. H. VERRILL, Pa. State 
 
 Normal School. 
 
 u The Etymology (Smith's) which we 
 procured of you we like much. It is the 
 best work for the class-rooin we have 
 seen." 
 
 From PRIN. WM. F. F HELPS, Minn. Slate 
 Normal. 
 
 "The book is superb just what is 
 needed in the department of etymology 
 and spelling." 
 
 From HON. EDWARD BALLARD, Supt. oj 
 Common Schools, State of Maine. 
 
 '' The author has furnished a manual of 
 singular utility for its purpose." 
 
 DICTIONARY. 
 
 Williams's Dictionary of Synonymes ; 
 
 Or, TOPICAL LEXICON. This work is a School Dictionary, an Etymology, a compilation 
 of Synonymes, and a manual of General Information. It differs from the ordinary lexicon 
 in being arranged by topics, instead of the letters of the alphabet, thus realizing the 
 apparent paradox of a " Readable Dictionary." An unusuaJ'y valuable school-book. 
 
 Kwong's Dictionary of English Phrases. 
 
 With Illustrative Sentences, collections of English and Chinese Proverbs, transla- 
 tions of Latin and French Phrases, historical sketch of the Chinese Empire, a chrono- 
 logical list of the Chinese Dynasties, brief biographical sketches of Confucius and 
 of Jesus, and complete index. By Kwong Ki Chin, late Member of the Chinese Edu- 
 cational Mission \n the United States, and formerly principal teacher of English in the 
 Government School at Shanghai, China. 9(0piges. Svo. Cloth. 
 
 From the Hartford Courant : " The volume is one of the most curious and interest- 
 ing of linguistic works." 
 
 From the New York Nation : " It will amaze the sand-lot gentry to bs informed that 
 this remarkable work will supplement our English dictionaries even for native Americans." 
 
 10 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES Or STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 ENGLISH GRAMMAR. 
 
 SILL'S SYSTEM. 
 Practical Lessons in English. 
 
 A brief course in Grammar and Composition. By J. M. B. SILL. This beautiful 
 hook, by a distinguished and experienced teacher, at once adopted for exclusive use 
 in the State of Oregon and the city of Detroit, simply releases English Grammar 
 from bondage to Latin and Greek formulas. Our language is worthy of being tanglit 
 as a distinct and indepei.dent science. It is almost destitute of inflections and yet 
 capable of being systematized, and its study may certainly be simplified if treated by 
 itself and for itsslf alone. Superintendent SILL has cut the Gordian knot and leads 
 the van of a new school of grammarians. 
 
 CLARK'S SYSTEM. 
 Clark's Easy Lessons in Language 
 
 Contains illustrated object-lessons of the most attractive character, and is couched 
 in language freed as much as possible from the dry technicalities of the science. 
 
 Clark's Brief English Grammar. 
 
 Part I. is adapted to youngest learners, and the whole forms a complete " brief 
 course " in one volume, adequate to the wants of the common school. There is no- 
 where published a superior text-book for learning thj English tongue than this. 
 
 Clark's Normal Grammar. 
 
 Designed to occupy the same grade as the author's veteran "Practical" Grammar, 
 though the latter is still furnished upon order. The Normal is an entirely new treatise. 
 It is a full exposition of the system as described below, with all the most recent im- 
 provements. Some of its peculiarities are, a happy blending of SYNTTHESES with 
 ANALYSES ; thorough criticisms of common errors in the use of our language ; and 
 important improvements in the syntax of sentences and of phrases. 
 
 Clark's Key to the Diagrams. 
 
 Clark's Analysis of the English Language. 
 
 Clark's Grammatical Chart. 
 
 The theory and practice of teaching grammar in American schools is meeting with a 
 thorough revolution from the use of this system. While the old methods offer profi- 
 ciency to the pupil only after much weary plodding and dull memorizing, this affords 
 from the inception the advantage of practical Object Teaching, addressing the eye by 
 means of illustrative figures ; furnishes association to the memory, its most powerful 
 aid, and diverts the pupil by taxjng his ingenuity. Teachers who are using Clark's 
 Grammar uniformly testify that they and their pupils find it the most interesting study 
 of the school course. 
 
 Like all great and radical improvements, the system naturally met at first with much 
 unreasonable opposition. It has not only outlived the greater part of this opposition, 
 bat finds many of its warmest admirers among those who could not at first tolerate so 
 radical an innovation. All it wants is an impartial trial to convince the most scep- 
 tical of its merit. No one who has fairly and intelligently tested it in the school-room 
 has ever been known to go back to the old method. A great success is nlre-idy 
 established, and it is easy to prophesy that the day is not far distant when it will be 
 the only system of teaching English Grammar. As the SYSTEM is copyrighted, no other 
 text-books can appropriate this obvious and great improvement. 
 
 Welch's Analysis of the English Sentence. 
 
 Remarkable for its new and simple classification, its method of treating connectives, 
 its explanations of the idioms and constructive laws of the language, &c. 
 
 11 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 MONTEITH'S SYSTEM. 
 
 TWO-BOOK SERIES. INDEPENDENT COURSE. 
 
 Elementary Geography. 
 
 Comprehensive Geography (with 103 maps). 
 
 ESP" These volumes are not revisions of old works, not an addition to any series, 
 but are entirely new productions, each by itself complete, independent, compieheii- 
 sive, yet simple, brief, cheap, and popular ; or, taken together, the most admirable 
 " series " ever ottered for a common-school course. They present the following features, 
 skilfully interwoven, the student learning all about one country at a time. Always 
 revised to date of printing. 
 
 LOCAL GEOGRAPHY. Or, the Use of Maps. Important features of the maps 
 are the coloring of States as objects, and the ingenious system for laying down a much 
 larger number of names for reference than are lound on any other maps of same size, 
 and without crowdincr. 
 
 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. Or, the Natural Features of the Earth; illus- 
 trated by the original and striking RELIEF MAPS, being bird's-eye views or photographic 
 pictures of the earth's surface. 
 
 DESCRIPTIVE GEOGRAPHY. Including the Physical; with some account 
 of Governments and Races, Animals, &e. 
 
 HISTORICAL GEOGRAPHY. Or, a brief summary of the salient points of 
 history, explaining the present distribution of nations, origin of geographical 
 names, &c. 
 
 MATHEMATICAL GEOGRAPHY. Including Astronomical, which describes 
 the Earth's position and character among planets ; also the Zones, Parallels, &c. 
 
 COMPARATIVE GEOGRAPHY. Or, a system of analogy, connecting new 
 lessons with the previous ones. Comparative sizes and latitudes are shown on the 
 margin of each map, and all countries are measured in the " frame of Kansas." 
 
 TOPICAL GEOGRAPHY. Consisting of questions for review, and testing 
 the student's general and specific knowledge of the subject, with suggestions for 
 geographical compositions. 
 
 ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY. A section devoted to this subject, with maps, will 
 be appreciated by teachers. It is seldom taught in our common schools, because it 
 has heretofore required the purchase of a separate book. 
 
 GRAPHIC GEOGRAPHY, or Map-Drawiug by Allen's "Unit of Measure- 
 ment" system (now almost universally recognized as without a rival), is introduced 
 throughout the lessons, and not as an appendix. 
 
 CONSTRUCTIVE GEOGRAPHY. Or, Globe-Making. With each book a set 
 of map segments is furnished, with which each student may make his own globe by 
 ibllowing the directions given. 
 
 RAILROAD GEOGRAPHY. With a grand commercial map of the United 
 States, illustrating steamer and railroad routes of travel in the United States, submarine 
 telegraph lines, &c. Also a " Practical Tour in Europe." 
 
 MONTEITH AND McNALLY'S SYSTEM. 
 
 THREE AND FIVE BOOKS. NATIONAL COURSE. 
 
 Monteith's First Lessons in Geography. 
 Monteith's New Manual of Geography. 
 McNally's System of Geography. 
 
 The new edition of McNally's Geography is now ready, rewritten throughout by 
 James Mouteitli and S. C. Frost. In its new dress, printed from new type, and illus- 
 trated with 100 new engravings, it is the latest, most attractive, as well as the most 
 thoroughly practical book on geography extant. 
 
 13 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 G EOG RAPH Y Continued. 
 
 INTERMEDIATE OR ALTERNATE VOLUMES IN THE FIVE BOOK SERIES. 
 
 Monteith's Introduction to Geography. 
 Monteith's Physical and Political Geography. 
 
 x. PRACTICAL OBJECT-TEACHING. The infant scholar is first introduced 
 to a picture whence he may derive notions of the shape of the earth, the phenomena of 
 day and night, the distribution of land and water, and the great natural divisions, 
 which mere words would fail entirely to convey to the untutored mind. Other pictures 
 follow on the same plan, and the child's mind is called upon to grasp no idea without 
 the aid of a pictorial illustration. Carried on to the higher books, this system culmi- 
 nates in Physical Geography, where such matters as climates, ocean currents, the 
 winds, peculiarities of the earth's crust, clouds and rain, are pictorially explained and 
 rendered apparent to the most obtuse. The illustrations used for this purpose belong 
 to the highest grade of art. 
 
 2. CLEAR, BEAUTIFUL, AND CORRECT MAPS. In the lower num- 
 bers the maps avoid unnecessary detail, while respectively progressive and affording 
 the pupil new matter for acquisition each time he approaches in the constantly en- 
 larging circle the point of coincidence with previous lessons in the more elementary 
 books. In the Physical and Political Geography the maps embrace many new and 
 striking features. One of the most effective of these is the new plan for displaying on 
 each map the relative sizes of countries not represented, thus obviating much confu- 
 sion which has arisen from the necessity of presenting maps in the same atlas drawn 
 on different scales. The maps of "McNally" have long been celebrated for their 
 superior beauty and completeness. This is the only school-book in which the attempt 
 to make a complete atlas also clear and distinct, has been successful. The map coloring 
 throughout the series is also noticeable. Delicate and subdued tints take the place of 
 the startling glare of inharmonious colors which too frequently in such treatises dazzle 
 the eyes, distract the attention, and serve to overwhelm the names of towns and the 
 natural features of the landscape. 
 
 3. THE VARIETY OF MAP-EXERCISE. Starting each time from a dif- 
 ferent basis, the pupil in many instances approaches the same fact no less than six 
 times, thus indelibly impressing it upon his memory. At the same time, this system is 
 not allowed to become wearisome, the extent of exercise on each subject being grad- 
 uated by its relative importance or difficulty of acquisition. 
 
 4. THE CHARACTER AND ARRANGEMENT OF THE DESCRIP- 
 TIVE TEXT. The cream of the science has been carefully culled, unimportant 
 matter rejected, elaboration avoided, and a brief and concise manner of presentation 
 cultivated. The orderly consideration of topics has contributed greatly to simplicity. 
 Due attention is paid to the facts in history and astronomy which are inseparably con- 
 nected with and important to the proper understanding of geography, and such only 
 are admitted on any terms. In a word, the National System teaches geography as a 
 science, pure, simple, and exhaustive. 
 
 5. ALWAYS UP TO THE TIMES. The authors of these books, editorially 
 speaking, never sleep. No change occurs in the boundaries of countries or of counties, 
 no new discovery is made, or railroad built, that is not at once noted and recorded, and 
 the next edition of each volume carries to every school-room the new order of thinvs. 
 
 6. FORM OF THE VOLUMES AND MECHANICAL EXECUTIpN, 
 The maps and text are no longer unnaturally divorced in accordance with the time- 
 honored practice of making text-books on this subject as inconvenient and expensive as 
 possible. On the contrary, all map questions are to be found on the page opposite tl.e 
 -map itself, and each book is complete in one volume. The mechanical execution is 
 
 unrivalled. Paper, printing, and binding are everything that could be desired. 
 
 7. MAP-DRAWING. In 1869 the system of map-drawing devised by Professor 
 Jerome Allen was secured exclusively for this series. It derives its claim to original- 
 ity and usefulness from the introduction of a fixed unit of measurement applicable to 
 every map. The principles being so few, simple, and comprehensive, the subject of 
 map-drawing is relieved of all practical difficulty. (In Nos. 2, 2*, and 3, and published 
 separately.) 
 
 8. ANALOGOUS OUTLINES. At the same time with map-drawing was also 
 introduced (in No. 2) a new and ingenious variety of Object Lessons, consisting of a 
 comparison of the outlines of countries with familiar objects pictorially represented. 
 
 14 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 GEOGRAPHY Continued. 
 
 9. SUPERIOR GRADATION. This is the only series which furnishes an avail- 
 able volume for every possible class in graded schools. It is not contemplated that a 
 pupil must necessarily go through every volume in succession to attain pn/i;:ieney. 
 Uu the contrary, two will suffice, but three are advised ; and, if the course will admit, 
 the whole series should be pursued. At all events, the books are at hand tor selection) 
 and every teacher, of every grade, can find among them one exactly suited to his class. 
 The best combination for those who wisli to abridge the course consists of Nos. 1, 2, 
 and 3 ; or, where children are somewhat advanced in other studies when they com- 
 mence geography, Nos. 1*, 2, and 3. Where but two books are admissible, Nos. 1* and 
 7 , or Nos. 2 and 3, are recommended. 
 
 A SHEEP RANCH IN MONTANA. 
 [Specimen Illustration from McNally's New Geography.] 
 
 13 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD CCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 GEOGRAPHY Continued. 
 
 Monteith's Physical Geography. 
 
 This is a clear, brief statement of the pnysical attributes of the earth and their rela- 
 tions to the heavens. The illustrations ai.u maps are numerous and helpful. It pro- 
 vides full instruction in this important branch of study in an attractive way for the 
 youngest scholars. It contains i>4 pages in quarto form. 
 
 MAP-DRAWING. 
 
 Monteith's Map-Drawing Made Easy. 
 
 A neat little book of outlines and instructions, giving the "corners of States" in 
 suitable blanks, so that maps can be drawn by unskilful hands from any atlas ; with 
 instructions for written exercises or compositions on geographical subjects, and com- 
 parative geography. 
 
 Monteith's Manual of Map-Drawing (Allen's System). 
 
 The only consistent plan, by which all maps are drawn on one scale. By its use 
 much time may be saved, and much interest and accurate knowledge gained. 
 
 Monteith's Map-Drawing and Object Lessons. 
 
 The last-named treatise, bound with Mr. Monteith's ingenious system for commit- 
 ting outlines to memory by means of pictures of living creatures and familiar objects. 
 Thus, South America resembles a dog's head ; Cuba, a lizard ; Italy, a boot ; France, a 
 coifee-pot ; Turkey, a turkey, &c., &c. 
 
 Monteith's Colored Blanks for Map-Drawing. 
 
 A new aid in teaching geography, which will be found especially useful in recitations, 
 reviews, and examinations. The series comprises any section of the world required. 
 
 Monteith's Map-Drawing Scal^. 
 
 A ruler of wood, graduated to the "Allen fixed unit of measurement." 
 
 WALL MAPS. 
 
 Monteith's Pictorial Chart of Geography. 
 
 The original drawing for this beautiful and instructive chart was greatly admired in 
 the publisher's " exhibit " at the Centennial Exhibition of 1876. It is a picture of the 
 earth's surface with every natural feature displayed, teaching also physical geography, 
 and especially the mutations of water. Tke uses to which man puts the earth and its 
 treasures and forces, as Agriculture, Mining, Manufacturing, Commerce, and Transpor- 
 tation, are also graphically portayed, so that the young learner gets a realistic idea of 
 "the world we live in," which weeks of book study might fail to convey. 
 
 Monteith's School Maps, 8 Numbers. 
 
 - The "School Series" includes the Hemispheres (2 maps), United States, North 
 America, South America, Europe, Asia, Africa. Price, $2.50 each. 
 
 Each map is 28x34 inches, beautifully colored, has the names all laid down, and is 
 substantially mounted on canvas with rollers. 
 
 Monteith's Grand Maps, 8 Numbers. 
 
 The "Grand Series" includes the Hemispheres (1 map). North America, United 
 States, South America, Europe, Asia, Africa, the World on Mercator's Projection, and 
 Physical Map of the World. Price, 5.00 each. Size, 42 x 52 inches, names laid down, 
 colored, mounted, &c. 
 
 Monteith's Sunday-School Maps. 
 
 Including a map of Paul's Travels (5.00), one of Ancient Canaan (3. 00), and Mod- 
 ern Palestine (-?3.00), or Palestine and Canaan together (.$5.00). 
 
 16 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 MATHEMATICS 
 
 DAVIES'S COMPLETE 
 
 Davies 
 Davies 
 Davies 
 
 Davies' Primary Arithmetic. 
 Davies' Intellectual Arithmetic. 
 
 Elements of Written Arithmetic. 
 
 Practical Arithmetic. 
 
 University Arithmetic. 
 
 TWO-BOOK SERIES. 
 
 First Book in Arithmetic, Primary and Mental 
 Complete Arithmetic. 
 
 ALGEBRA. 
 
 Davies' New Elementary Algebra. 
 Davies' University Algebra. 
 Davies' New Bourdon's Algebra. 
 
 GEOMETRY. 
 
 Davies' Elementary Geometry and Trigonometry. 
 Davies' Legendre's Geometry. 
 Davies' Analytical Geometry and Calculus. 
 Davies' Descriptive Geometry. 
 Davies' New Calculus. 
 
 MENSURATION. 
 
 Davies' Practical Mathematics and Mensuration. 
 
 Davies' Elements of Surveying. 
 
 Davies' Shades, Shadows, and Perspective. 
 
 MATHEMATICAL SCIENCE. 
 Davies' Grammar of Arithmetic. 
 Davies' Outlines of Mathematical Science. 
 Davies' Nature and Utility of Mathematics. 
 Davies' Metric System. 
 Davies & Peck's Dictionary of Mathematics. 
 
 17 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 DAVIES'S NATIONAL COURSE 
 OF MATHEMATICS. 
 
 ITS RECORD. 
 
 In claiming for this series the first place among American text-books, of whatever 
 class, the publishers appeal to the magnificent record which its volumes have earned 
 during the tkirty-jhe years of Dr. Charles Davies's mathematical labors. The unremit- 
 ting exertions of a l.fe-time have placed the modern series on tlie same proud eminence 
 among competitors that each of its predecessors had successively enjoyed in a course of 
 constantly improved editions, now rounded to their perfect fruition, for it seems 
 almost that this science is susceptible of no further demonstration. 
 
 During the period alluded to, many authors and editors in this department h?ve 
 started into public notice, and, by borrowing ideas and processes original with Dr. Davies, 
 have enjoyed a brief popularity, but are now almost unknown. Many of the series of 
 to-day, built upon a similar basis, and described as " modern books," are destined to a 
 similar fate ; while the most far-seeing eye will find it diflicult to fix the time, on the 
 basis of any data afforded by their past history, when these books will cease to increase 
 and prosper, and fix a still firmer hold on the affection of every educated American. 
 
 One cause of this unparalleled popularity is found in the fact that the eiiterfin.se of the 
 author did not cease with the original completion of his books. Always a praciicai 
 teacher, he has incorporated in his text-books from time to time tlie ad vantages or every 
 improvement in method* of teaching, and every advance in science. During ail the 
 years in which he has been laboring he constantly submitted his own theories and those 
 of others to the practical test of the class-room, approving, rejecting, or modify ing 
 them as the experience thus obtained might suggest. In this way he has been aiile 
 to produce an almost perfect series of class-books, in which every department of 
 mathematics has received minute and exhaustive attention. 
 
 Upon tlie death of Dr. Davies, which took place in 1876, his work was immediately 
 taken up by his former pupil and mathematical associate of many years, Prof. W. G. 
 Peck, LL.D., of Columbia College. By him, with Prof. J. H. Van Amringe, of Columbia 
 College, the original series is kept carefully revised and up to the times. 
 
 DAVIES'S SYSTEM is THE ACKNOWLEDGED NATIONAL STANDARD FOR THE UNITED 
 STATES, for the following reasons : 
 
 1st. It is the basis of instruction in the great national schools at West Point and 
 Annapolis. 
 
 2d. It has received the quasi indorsement of the National Congress. 
 
 3d. It is exclusively used in the public schools of the National Capital. 
 
 4th. The officials of the Government use it as authority in all cases involving mathe- 
 matical questions. 
 
 5th. Our great soldiers and sailors commanding the national armies and navies were 
 educated in this system. So have been a majority of eminent scientists in this country. 
 All these refer to " Davies " as authority. 
 
 6th. A larger number of American citizens have received their education from this 
 than from any other series. 
 
 7th. The scries has a larger circulation throughout the whole country than any other, 
 being extensive;/!/ used in every State in the Union. 
 
 It 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 DAVIES AND PECK'S ARITHMETICS. 
 
 OPTIONAL OR CONSECUTIVE, 
 
 The best thoughts of these two illustrious mathematicians are combined in (he 
 Following beautiful works, which are the natural successors of Davies's Arithmetics, 
 sumptuously printed, and bound iu crimson, green, and gold: 
 
 Davies and Peck's Brief Arithmetic. 
 
 Also called the " Elementary Arithmetic." It is the shortest presentation of the sub- 
 ject, and is ndiqiiatt: for all grades in common schools, being a thorough introduction to 
 practical lite, except for the specialist. 
 
 At h'rst the authors play with the little learner for a few lessons, by object-teaching 
 and kindred allurements ; but he soon begins to realize that study is earnest, as he 
 becomes familiar with the simpler operations, and is delighted to find himself master of 
 important resuKs. 
 
 The second part reviews the Fundamental Operations on a scale proportioned iu 
 the enlarged intelligence of the learner. It establishes the General Principles and 
 Properties of Numbers, and then proceeds to Fractions. Currency and the Metric 
 (System are fully treated in connection with Decimals. Compound Numbers and Re- 
 duction follow, and finally Percentage with all its varied applications. 
 
 An Index of words and principles concludes the book, for which every scholar and 
 most teachers will be grateful. How much time has been spent in searching for a half- 
 forgotten definition or principle in a former lesson ! 
 
 Davies and Peck's Complete Arithmetic. 
 
 This work c :rtainly deserves its name in the best sense. Though complete, it is not, 
 like most others which hear the same title, cumbersome. These authors excel in clear, 
 lucid demonstrations, teaching tl.e science pure and simple, yet not ignoring convenient 
 methods ;:i.d practical applications. 
 
 For turning out a thorough business man no other work is so well adapted. He will 
 have a clear comprehension, of the science as a whole, and a working acquaintance 
 with detai.s which must serve him well in all emergencies. Distinguishing features of 
 the book are the logical progression of the subjects and the great variety of practical 
 problems, not. puzzle*, which are beneath the dignity of educational science. A clear- 
 minded critic Las said of Dr. Peck's work that it is free from that juggling with 
 numbers which fome authors falsely call " Analysis." A series of Tables for converting 
 ordinal y weights ahd measures into the Metric .System appear in the later editions. 
 
 PECK'S ARITHMETICS. 
 Peck's First Lessons in Numbers. 
 
 This book begins with pictorial illustrations, and unfolds gradually the science of 
 numbers. It noticeably simplifies the subject by developing the principles of addition 
 and subtraction simultaneously ; as it does, also, those of multiplication and division. 
 
 Peck's Manual of Arithmetic. 
 
 This hook is designed especially 'or those who seek sufficient instruction to carry 
 them successfully through practical life, but have not time for extended study. 
 
 Peck's Complete Arithmetic. 
 
 This completes the series but is a much briefer book than most of the complete 
 arithmetics, and is recommended not only for what it contains, but also for what is 
 omitted. 
 
 It may be said of Dr. Peck's books more truly than of any other series published, that 
 they are clear and simple in definition and rule, and that superfluous matter of every 
 Kind has been faithfully eliminated, thus magnifying the working value of the book 
 ud saving unnecessary expense of time and labor. 
 
 19 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 BARNES'S NEW MATHEMATICS. 
 
 In this series JOSEPH FICKLIN, Ph. D., Proi'essor of Mathematics and Astronomy 
 in the University of Missouri, lias combined all the best and latest results of practical 
 and experimental teaching of arithmetic with the assistance of many distinguished 
 mathematical authors. 
 
 Barnes's Elementary Arithmetic. 
 Barnes's National Arithmetic. 
 
 These two works constitute a complete arithmetical course in two books. 
 
 They meet the demand for text-books that will help students to acquire the greatest 
 amount of useful and practical knowledge of Arithmetic by the smallest expenditure of 
 time, labor, and money. Nearly every topic in Written Arithmetic is introduced, and its 
 principles illustrated, by exercises in Oral Arithmetic. The free use of Equations ; the 
 concise method of combining and treating Properties of Numbers; the treatment of 
 Multiplication and Division of Fractions in two cases, and then reduceO-to one; Can- 
 cellation by the use of the vertical line, especially in Fractions, Interest, and Proportion ; 
 the brief, simple, and greatly superior method of working Partial Payments by the 
 41 Time Table " and Cancellation ; the substitution of formulas to a great extent for 
 rules; the full and practical treatment of the Metric System, &c., indicate their com- 
 pleteness. A variety of methods and processes for the same topic, which deprive the 
 pupil of the great benefit of doing a part of the thinking and labor for himself, have 
 beeu discarded. The statement of principles, definitions, rules, &c., is brief and simple. 
 The illustrations and methods are explicit, direct, and practical. The great number 
 and variety of Examples embody the actual business of the day. The very large 
 amount of matter condensed in so small a compass has beeu accomplished by econo- 
 mizing every line of space, by rejecting superfluous matter and obsolete terms, and by 
 avoiding the repetition of analyses, explanations, and operations in the advanced topics 
 which have been used in the more elementary parts of these books. 
 
 AUXJLI ARIES. 
 
 For use in district schools, and for supplying a text-book in advanced work for 
 {lasses having finished the course as given in the ordinary Practical Arithmetics, the 
 National Arithmetic has been divided and boutd separately, as follows : 
 
 Barnes's Practical Arithmetic. 
 ' liarnes's Advanced Arithmetic. 
 
 In many schools there are classes that for various reasons never reach beyond 
 Percentage. It is just such cases where Barnes's Practical Arithmetic will answer a 
 good purpose, at a price to the jwpil much less than to buy the complete book. On the 
 other hand, classes having finished the ordinary Practical Arithmetic can proceed 
 with the higher course by using Barnes's Advanced Arithmetic. 
 
 For primary schools requiring simply a table Ixwk, and the earliest rudiments 
 forcibly presented through object-teaching and copious illustiations, we have 
 prepared 
 
 Barnes's First Lessons in Arithmetic, 
 
 which begins with the most elementary notions of numbers, and proceeds, by simple 
 steps, to develop all the fundamental principles of Arithmetic. 
 
 Barnes's Elements of Algebra. 
 
 This work, as its title indicates, is elementary in its character and suitable for use, 
 (1) in such public schools as give instruction in the Elements of Algebra : (2) in institu- 
 tions of learning whose courses of study do not include Higher Algebra ; (3) in schools 
 whose object is to prepare students for entrance into our colleges and universities. 
 This book will also meet the wants of students of Physics who require some knowledge ot 
 
 20 
 
THE NATWAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 Algebra. The student's progress in Algebra depends very largely upon the proper treat- 
 ment of the four Fundamental Operations* The terms Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, 
 and Division in Algebra have a wider meaning than in Arithmetic, and these operations 
 have been so denned as to include their arithmetical meaning ; so that the beginner 
 is sinrply called upon to enlarge his views of those fundamental operations. Much 
 attention has been given to the explanation of the negative sign, in order to remove the 
 well-known difficulties in the use and interpretation of that sign. Special attention is 
 here called to " A Short Method of Removing Symbols of Aggregation," Art. 76. On 
 account of their importance, the subjects of Factoring, Greatest Cowman Dirisor, and 
 Least Common Multiple have been treated at greater length than Is usual in elementary 
 works. In the treatment of Fractions, a method is used which is quite simple, and', 
 at tl/e same time, more general than that usually employed. In connection with R<idicl 
 Quantities the roots are expressed by fractional exponents, for the principles and rules 
 applicable to integral exponents may then be used without modification. The Equation 
 is made the chief subject of thought in this work. It is defined near the beginning, 
 and used extensively in every chapter. In addition to this, four chapters are devoted 
 exclusively to the subject of Equations. All Proportions are equations, and in their 
 treatment as such all the difficulty commonly connected with the subject of Proportion 
 disappears. The chapter on Logarithms will doubtless be acceptable to many teachers 
 who do not require the student to master Higher Algebra before entering upon the 
 study of Trigonometry. 
 
 HIGHER MATHEMATICS. 
 Peck's Manual of Algebra. 
 
 Bringing the methods of Bourdon within the range of the Academic Course. 
 
 Peck's Manual of Geometry. 
 
 By a method purely practical, and unembarrassed by the details which rather confuse 
 than simplify science. 
 
 Peck's Practical Calculus. 
 Peck's Analytical Geometry. 
 Peck's Elementary Mechanics. 
 Peck's Mechanics, with Calculus. 
 
 The briefest treatises on these subjects now published. Adopted by the great Univer- 
 sities : Yale, Harvard, Columbia, Princeton, Cornell, &c. 
 
 Macnie's Algebraical Equations. 
 
 Serving as a complement to the more advanced treatises on Algebra, giving special 
 attention to the analysis and solution of equations with numerical coefficients. 
 
 Church's Elements of Calculus. 
 
 Church's Analytical Geometry. 
 
 Church's Descriptive Geometry. With plates. % vols. 
 
 These volumes constitute the "West Point Course "in their several deparments. 
 Prof. Church was long the eminent professor of mathematics at West Point Military 
 Academy, and his works are standard in all the leading colleges. 
 
 Courtenay's Elements of Calculus. 
 
 A standard work of the very highest grade, presenting the most elaborate attainable 
 survey of the subject. 
 
 Hackley's Trigonometry. 
 
 With applications to Navigation and Surveying, Nautical and Practical Geometry, 
 and Geodesy. 
 
 21 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 GENERAL HISTORY. 
 
 Monteith's Youth's History of the United States. 
 
 A History of the United States for beginners. It is arranged upon the catechetical plan, 
 with illustrative maps and engravings, re view questions, dates in parentheses (that their 
 study may be optional with the younger class of learners), and interesting biographical 
 sketches of all persons who have been prominently identified with the history of our 
 country. 
 
 Willard's United States. School and University Editions. 
 
 The plan of this standard work is chronologically exhibited in front of the titlepage. 
 The maps and sketches are found useful assistants to the memory ; and dates, usually 
 so difficult to remember, are so systematically arranged as in a great degree to obviate 
 the difficulty. Candor, impartiality, and accuracy are the distinguishing features of 
 the narrative portion. 
 
 Willard's Universal History. New Edition. 
 
 The most valuable features of the " United States " are reproduced in this. The 
 peculiarities of the work are its great conciseness and the prominence given to the 
 chronological order of events. The margin marks each successive era with great dis- 
 tinctness, so that the pupil retains not only the event but its time, and thus fixes the 
 order of history firmly and usefully in his mind. Mrs. Willard's books are constantly 
 revised, and at all times written up to embrace important historical events of recent 
 date. Professor Arthur Oilman has edited the last twenty-five years to 1882. 
 
 Lancaster's English History. 
 
 By the Master of the Stoughton Grammar School, Boston. The most practical of the 
 " brief books." Though short, it is not a bare and uninteresting outline, but contains 
 enough of explanation and detai 1 to make intelligible the cause and effect of events. 
 Their relations to the history and development of the American people is made specially 
 prominent. 
 
 Willis's Historical Reader. 
 
 Being Collier's Great Events of History adapted to American schools. This rare 
 epitome of general history, remarkable for its charming style and judicious selection of 
 events on which the destinies of nations have turned, has been skilfully manipulated 
 by Professor Willis, with as few changes as would bring the United States into its proper 
 position in the historical perspective. As reader or text-book it has few equals and no . 
 superior. 
 
 Berard's History of England. 
 
 By an authoress well known for the success of her History of the United States. 
 The social life of the English people is felicitously interwoven, as in fact, with the civil 
 and military transactions of the realm. 
 
 Ricord's History of Rome. 
 
 Possesses the charm of an attractive romance. The fables with which this history 
 abounds are introduced in such a way as not to deceive the inexperienced, while adding 
 materially to the value of the work as a reliable index to the character and institutions, 
 as well as the historv of the Roman people. 
 
 22 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 HISTORY Continued. 
 
 Hanna's Bible History. 
 
 The only compendium of Bible narrative which affords a connected and chronological 
 view of the important events there recorded, divested of all superfluous detail. 
 
 Summary of History ; American, French, and English. 
 
 A well-proportioned outline of leading events, condensing the substance of the more 
 extensive text-books in common use into a series of statements so brief, that every 
 word may be committed to memory, and yet so comprehensive that it presents an 
 accurate though general view of the whole continuous life of nations. 
 
 Marsh's Ecclesiastical History. 
 
 Affording the History of the Church in all ages, with accounts of the pagan world 
 during the biblical periods, and the character, rise, and progress of all religions, as well 
 as the various sects of the worshippers of Christ. The work is entirely non-sectarian, 
 though strictly catholic. A separate volume contains carefully prepared questions for 
 class use. 
 
 Mill's History of the Ancient Hebrews. 
 
 With valuable Chronological Charts, prepared by Professor Edwards of N. Y. This 
 is a succinct account of the chosen people of God to the time of the destruction of 
 Jerusalem. Complete in one volume. 
 
 Topical History Chart Book. 
 
 By Miss Ida P. Whitcomb. To be used in connection with any History, Ancient or 
 Modern, instead of the ordinary blank book for summary. It embodies the names of 
 cnntfini>i>i-iu-ii 1-nlci-n from the earliest to the present time, with blanks under each, in 
 which the pupil may write the summary of the life of the ruler. 
 
 Oilman's First Steps in General History. 
 
 A "suggestive outline" of rare compactness. Each country is treated by itself, and 
 the United States receive special attention. Frequent maps, contemporary events in 
 tables, references to standard works for fuller details, and a minute Index' constitute 
 the " Illustrative Apparatus.' 1 From no other work that we know of can so succinct a 
 view of the world's history be obtained. Considering the necessary limitation of space, 
 the style is surprisingly vivid, and at times even ornate. In all respects a charming, 
 though not the less practical, text-book. 
 
 Baker's Brief History of Texas. 
 Dimitry's History of Louisana. 
 Alison's Napoleon First. 
 
 The history of Europe from 1788 to 1S15. By Archibald Alison. Abridged by Edward 
 S. Gould. One vol., Svo, with appendix, questions, and maps. 550 pages. 
 
 Lord's Points of History. 
 
 The salient points in the history of the world arranged catechetically for class use or 
 for review and examination of teacher or pupil. By John Lord, LL.D. 12mo, 300 
 
 pages. 
 
 Carrington's Battle Maps and Charts of the American 
 Revolution. 
 
 Topographical Maps and Chronological Charts of every battle, with 3 steel portraits 
 of Washington. Svo, cloth. 
 
 Condit's History of the English Bible. 
 
 For theological and historical students this book has an intrinsic value. It gives the 
 history of all the English translations down to the present time, together with a careful 
 review of their influence upon English literature and language. 
 
 23 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 BARNES'S ONE-TERM HISTORY 
 SERIES. 
 
 A Brief History of the United 
 States. 
 
 This is probably the MOST ORIGINAL SCHOOL-BOOK pub- 
 lished for many years, in any department. A few of it? 
 claims are the following : 
 
 1. Brevity. The text is complete for grammar school 
 or intermediate classes, in 290 12im> pages, large type. 
 It may readily be completed, if desired, in one term of 
 study. 
 
 2. Comprehensiveness. Though so brief, this book 
 contains the pith of all the wearying contents of the larger 
 manuals, and a great deal more than the memory usually 
 retains I'roin the latter. 
 
 3. Interest has been a prime consideration. Small 
 
 books have heretofore been bare, full of dry statistics, unattractive. This one is 
 charmingly written, replete with anecdote, and brilliant with illustration. 
 
 4. Proportion of Events. It is remarkable for the discrimination with which 
 the different portions of our history are presented according to their importance. Thus 
 the older works, being already large books when the Civil War took place, give it less 
 space than that accorded to the Revolution. 
 
 5. Arrangement. In six epochs, entitled respectively, Discovery and Settlement, 
 the Colonies, the Revolution, Growth of States, the Civil War. and Current Events. 
 
 6. Catch Words. Each paragraph is preceded by its leading thought in promi- 
 nent type, standing in the student's mind for the whole paragraph. 
 
 7:- Key Notes. Analogous with this is the idea of grouping battles, c.., about 
 some central event, which relieves the sameness so common in such descriptions, and 
 renders each distinct by some striking peculiarity of its own. 
 
 8. Foot-Notes. These are crowded with interesting matter that is not strictly a 
 part of history proper. They may be learned or not, at pleasure. They are certain 
 in any event to be read. 
 
 9. Biogiaphies of all the leading characters are given in full in foot-notes. 
 
 10. Maps. Elegant and distinct maps from engravings on copper-plate, and beauti- 
 fully colored, precede each epoch, and contain all the places named. 
 
 n. Questions are at the back of the book, to compel a more independent use of the 
 text. Both text and questions are so worded that the pupil must give intelligent 
 answers IN HIS OWN WORDS. " Yes" and "No " will not do. 
 
 24 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-COOKS. 
 
 HISTORY Continued. 
 
 12. Historical Recreations. These are additional questions to test the student's 
 knowledge, in review, ;is : "What trees are celebrated in our history?" "When 
 did a Jog save our army?" "What Presidents died in office?" "When was the 
 Mississippi our western boundary?" "Who said, 'I would rather be right than 
 President ' ? " &c. 
 
 13. The Illustrations, about seventy in number, are the work of our best artists 
 and engravers, produced at great expense. They are vivid and interesting, and mostly 
 upon subjects never before illustrated in a school-book. 
 
 14 Dates Only the leading dates are given in the text, and these are so associated 
 as to assist the memory, but at the head of each page is the date of the event imt 
 mentioned, and at the close of each epoch a summary of events and dates. 
 
 15. The Philosophy of History is studiously exhibited, the causes and effects 
 of events being distinctly traced and their inter-connection shown. 
 
 16. Impartiality. All sectional, partisan, or denominational views are avoided. 
 Facts are stated after a careful comparison of all authorities without the least prejudice 
 or favor. 
 
 17. Index. A verbal index at the close of the book perfects it as a work of reference. 
 It will be observed that the above are all particulars in which School Histories have 
 
 been signally defective, or altogether wanting. Many otlicr claims to favor it shares in 
 common with its predecessors. 
 
 TESTIMONIALS. 
 
 From PROF. WM. F. ALLEN, Slate Uni- 
 versity of H'isconsin. 
 
 "Two features that I like re.ry much 
 are the anecdotes at the foot of the page 
 and the 'Historical Recreations' in the 
 Appendix. The latter, I think, is quite 
 a n-w feature, and the other is very well 
 executed." 
 
 From HON. NEWTON BATEMAN, Superin- 
 tendent Public Instruction, Illinois. 
 " Barnes's One-Term History of the 
 United States is an exceedingly attrac- 
 tive and spirited little book. Its claim 
 to several new and valuable features seems 
 well founded. Under the form of six well- 
 defined epochs, the history of the United 
 States is traced tersely, yet pithily, from 
 the earliest times to the present day. A 
 good map precedes each epoch, whereby 
 the history and geography of the period 
 may be studied together, ns tttry nlwnys 
 sfionl I. be. The syllabus of each paragraph 
 is made to stand in such bold relief, by 
 the use of large, heavy type, as to be of 
 much mnemonic value to the student. The 
 book is written in a sprightly and pi- 
 
 Suant style, the interest never llag.-'ing 
 om beginning to end, a rare and diffi- 
 cult achievement in works of this kind." 
 
 From HON. ABNER J. PHIPPS, Sipe rill- 
 ten lent S-hools, Lwiston, Maine,. 
 4 - Barnes's History of the United States 
 
 has been used for severnl years in the 
 Lewiston schools, and has proved a very 
 satisfactory work. I have examined the 
 new edition of it." 
 
 From HON. R. K. BUCHET/L, City Superin- 
 tendent S hoofs, L-nicaster, Pa. 
 
 " It is the best history of the kind I have 
 ever seen.'' 
 
 From T. J. CHARLTON, Superintendent 
 
 Public Schools, Vincmn-s, In I. 
 " We have used it here for six years, 
 and it has given almost per.ect satisfac- 
 tion. . . . The notes in fine print at the 
 bottom of the pages are of especial value." 
 
 From PROF. WM. A. MOWRY, E. ,j- C. 
 
 School, Providence, Jt. /. 
 
 " Permit me to express my high appre- 
 ciation of your book. I wish all text- 
 books for the young had equal merit." 
 
 From HON. A. M. K El LEY, City Attnrneij, 
 Lute Mayor, and President of the School 
 Board, City of RichmonJ, Va. 
 " I do not hesitate to volunteer to you 
 the opinion that Barnes 's History is en- 
 titled to the preference in almost every 
 respect that distinguishes a good school- 
 book. . . . The narrative generally exhibits 
 the temper of the jud^e ; rarely, if ever, 
 of the advocate." 
 
 25 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 A Brief History of An- 
 cient Peoples. 
 
 With an account of their monuments, 
 literature, and manners. 340 pages. 
 12mo. Profusely illustrated. 
 
 In this work 'the political history, 
 which occupies nearly, if not all, 
 the ordinary school text, is condensed 
 to the salient and essential facts, in 
 order to give room for a clear outline 
 of the literature, religion, architecture, 
 character, habits, &o., of each nation. 
 Surely it is as important to know some- 
 tking'abmit Plato as all about Caesar, 
 and to learn how the ancients wrote 
 their books as how they fought their 
 battles. 
 
 The chapters on Manners and Cus- 
 toms and the Scenes in Real Life repre- 
 sent the people of history as men and 
 women subject to the same wants, hopes 
 and fears as ourselves, and so bring the distant past near to us. The Scenes, which are 
 intended only for reading, are the result of a careful study of the unequalled collections of 
 monuments in the London and Berlin Museums, of the ruins in Rome and Pompeii, and 
 of the latest authorities on the domestic life of ancient peoples. Though intentionally 
 written in a semi-romantic style, they are accurate pictures of what might have occurred 
 and some of them are simple transcriptions of the details sculptured in Assyrian 
 alabaster or painted on Egyptian walls. 
 
 26 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 HISTORY Continued. 
 
 The extracts made from the sacred books of the East are not specimens of their style 
 and teachings, but only gems selected often from a mass of matter, much of which would 
 be absurd, ineaningless, and even revolting. It has not seemed best to cumber a booic 
 like this with selections conveying no moral lesson. 
 
 Ihe numerous cross-references, the abundant dates in parenthesis, the pronunciation 
 of the names in the Index, the choice reading references at the close of each general 
 subject, and the novel Historical Recreations in the Appendix, will be of service to 
 teacher and pupil alike. 
 
 Though designed primarily for a text-book, a large class of persons general readers, 
 who desire to know something about the progress of historic criticism and ,ne recent 
 discoveries made among the resurrected monuments of the East, but have no leisure to 
 read the ponderous volumes of Brugsch, Layard, Grote, Mommseu, and lime will lind 
 tli is volume just what they need. 
 
 Frnm HOMER B. SPRAGUE, Heal Master 
 Girls' II/f/h Schod, H'e.st Newton St., Bos- 
 t-n,M,ss. 
 " I Vug to recommend in strong terms 
 
 the adoption of Barnes's 'History of 
 
 Ancient Peoples' as a text-book. It is 
 about as nearly perfect as could be 
 hoped for. The adoption would give 
 great relish to the study of Ancient 
 History." 
 
 HE Brief History of France. 
 
 By the author of the " Brhf United States," 
 ^r with all the attractive features of that popu- 
 lar work (which see) and new ones of its own. 
 
 It is believed ti;at the History of France 
 has never before been presented in such 
 brief compass, and this is effected without 
 sacrificing one particle of interest. The book 
 reads like a romance, and, while drawing the 
 student by an irresistible fascination to his 
 task, impresses the great outlines indelibly upon the memory. 
 
 27 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 DRAWING. 
 
 BARNES'S POPULAR DRAWING SERIES. 
 
 Based upon the experience of the most successful teachers of drawing in the United 
 States. 
 
 The Primary Course, consisting of a manual, ten cards, and three primary 
 drawing books. A, B, and C. 
 
 Intermediate Course. Four numbers and a manual. 
 
 Advanced Course. Four numbers and a manual. 
 
 Instrumental Course. Four numbers and a manual. 
 
 The Intenneuiate, Advanced, and Instrumental Courses are furnished either in book 
 or card form at the same prices. The books contain the usual blanks, with the unusual 
 advantage of opening Irom the pupil, placing the copy directly in front and above 
 the blank, thus occupying but little desk-room. The cards are in the end more econom- 
 ical than the books, if used in connection with the patent blank folios that accompany 
 this series. 
 
 The cards are arranged to be bound (or tied) in the folios and removed at pleasure. 
 The pupil at the end of each number has a complete book, containing only his own 
 work, while the copies are preserved and inserted in another fol.o reaily for use in the 
 next class. 
 
 Patent Blank Folios. No. 1. Adapted to Intermediate Course. No. 2. Adap'ed 
 to Advanced and Instrumental Courses. 
 
 ADVANTAGES OF THIS SERIES. 
 
 The Plan and Arrangement. The examples are so arranged that teachers and 
 pupils can see, at a glance, how they are to be treated and where they are to lie copied. 
 In this system, copying and designing do not receive all the attention. The plan is 
 broader in its aims, dealing with drawing as a branch of common-school instruction, 
 and giving it a wide educational value. 
 
 Correct Methods. In this system the pupil is led to rely upon himself, and not 
 upon delusive mechanical aids, as printed guide-marks, &c. 
 
 One of the principal objects of any good course in freehand drawing is to educate the 
 eye to estimate location, form, and size. A system which weakens the motive or re- 
 moves the necessity of thinking is false in theory and ruinous in practice. The object 
 should be to educate, not crani ; to develop the intelligence, not teach tricks. 
 
 Artistic Effect. The beauty of the examples is not destroyed by crowding the 
 pages with useless arid badly printed text. The Manuals contain all necessary 
 instruction. 
 
 Stages of Development. Many of the examples are accompanied by diagrams, 
 showing the different stages of development. 
 
 Lithographed Examples. The examples are printed in imitation of pencil 
 drawing (not in hard, black lines) that the pupil's work may resemble them. 
 
 One Term's Work. Each book contains what can be accomplished in an average 
 term, and no more. Thus a pupil finishes one book before beginning another. 
 
 Quality not Quantity. Success in drawing depends upon the amount of thovght 
 exercised by the pupil, and not upon the large number of examples drawn. 
 
 Designing. Elementary design is more skilfully taught in this system than by 
 any other. In addition to the instruction given in the books, the pupilwill find prii.ted 
 on the insides of the covers a variety of beautiful patterns. 
 
 Enlargement and Reduction. The practice of enlarging and reducing from 
 copies is not commenced until the pupil is well advanced in the course and therefore 
 better able to cope with this difficult feature in drawing. 
 
 Natural Forms. This is the only course that gives at convenient intervals easy 
 arid progressive exercises in the drawing of natural forms. 
 
 Economy. By the patent binding described above, the copies need not be thrown 
 aside when a book is filled out, but are preserved in perfect condition for future use. 
 The blank books, only, will have to be purchased after the first introduction, thus effect- 
 ing a saving of more than half in the usual cost of drawing-books. 
 
 Manuals for Teachers. The Manuals accompanying this series contain practical 
 instructions for conducting drawing in the class-room, with definite directions for draw- 
 ing each of the examples in the books, instructions for designing, model and object 
 drawing, drawing from natural forms, &c. 
 
 28 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 DRAWING Continued. 
 
 Chapman's American Drawing-Book. 
 
 The standard American text-book and authority in all branches of art. A compilation 
 of art principles. A manual for the amateur, and basis of study for the professional 
 artist. Adapted for schools and private instruction. 
 
 CONTENTS. "Any one who can Learn to Write can Learn to Draw. " Primary In- 
 struction in Drawing. Rudiments of Drawing the Human ' Head. Rudiments in 
 Drawing the Human Figure. Rudiments of Drawing. The Elements of Geometry. - 
 Perspective. Of Studying and Sketching from Nature. Of Painting. Etching and 
 Engraving . Of Modelling. Of Composition. Advice to the American Art-Student. 
 
 The work is of course magnificently illustrated with all the original designs. 
 
 Chapman's Elementary Drawing-Book. 
 
 A progressive course of practical exercise.*, or a text-book for the training of the 
 eye and hand. It contains the elements from the larger work, and a copy should be in 
 the hands of every pupil ; while a copy of the " American Drawing-Book," named above, 
 should be at hand for reference by the class. 
 
 Clark's Elements of Drawing. 
 
 A complete course in this graceful art, from the first rudiments of outline to the 
 finished sketches of landscape and scenery. 
 
 Allen's Map-Drawing and Scale. 
 
 This method introduces a new era in map-drawing, for the following reasons : 1. It 
 is a system. This is its greatest merit. 2. It is easily understood and taught. 
 3. The eye is trained to exact measurement by the use of a scale. 4. By no special 
 effort of the memory, distance and comparative size are fixed in the mind. 5. It dis- 
 cards useless construction of lines. 6. It can be taught by any teacher, even though 
 there may have been no previous practice in map-drawing. 7. Any pupil old enough 
 to study geography can learn by this system, in a short time, to draw accurate maps. 
 8. The system is not the result of theory, but comes directly from the school-room. 
 It has been thoroughly and successfully tested there, with all grades of pupils. J>. It 
 is economical, as it requires no mapping plates. It gives the pupil the ability of rapidly 
 drawing accurate maps. 
 
 FINE ARTS. 
 
 Hamerton's Art Essays (Atlas Series) : 
 
 No. 1. The Practical "Work of Painting. 
 
 "With portrait of Rubens. 8vo. Paper covers. 
 
 No. 2. Modern Schools of Art- 
 Including American, English, and Continental Painting. 8vo. Paper covers. 
 
 Huntington's Manual of the Fine Arts. 
 
 A careful manual of instruction in the history of art, up to the present time. 
 
 Boyd's Kames' Elements of Criticism. 
 
 The best edition of the best work on art and literary criticism ever produced in 
 English. 
 
 Benedict's Tour Through Europe. 
 
 A valuable companion for any one wishing to visit the galleries and sights of the 
 continent of Europe, as well as a charming book of travels. 
 
 Dwight's Mythology. 
 
 A knowledge of mythology is necessary to an appreciation of ancient art 
 
 Walker's World's Fair. 
 
 The industrial and artistic display at the Centennial Exhibition. 
 
 29 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 BOOK-KEEPING TEXT. 
 
 Powers's Practical Book-keeping. 
 Powers's Blanks to Practical Book-keeping. 
 
 A Treatise on Book-keeping, for Public Schools and Academies. By Millard R. 
 Powers, M. A. This work is designed to impart instruction upon the science of accounts, 
 as applied to mercantile business, and it is Iwlieved that more knowledge, and thj.t, tooj 
 of a more practical nature, can be gained by the plan introduced in this work, than by 
 any other published. 
 
 Folsom's Logical Book-keeping. 
 Folsom's Blanks to Book-keeping. 
 
 This treatise embraces the interesting and important discoveries of Professor Folsom (of 
 the Albany " Bryant & Stratton College "), the partial enunciation of which in lectures 
 and otherwise has attracted so much attention in circles interested in commercial 
 education. 
 
 After studying business phenomena for many years, he has arrived at the positive 
 laws and principles that underlie the whole subject of accounts ; finds that the science 
 is based in value as a generic term ; that value divides into two clisses with varied 
 species ; that all the exchanges of values are reducible to nine equations ; and that all 
 the results of all these exchanges are limited to thirteen in number. 
 
 As accounts have been universally taught hitherto, without setting out from a radical 
 analysis or definition of values, the science has been kept in great obscurity, and been 
 made as difficult to impart as to acquire. On the new theory, however, these obstacles 
 are chiefly removed. In reading over the first part of it, in which the governing laws 
 and principles arc discussed, a person with ordinary intelligence will obtain a fair con- 
 ception of the double-entry process of accounts. But when he comes to study thoroughly 
 these laws and principles as there enunciated, and works out the examples and memo- 
 randa which elucidate the thirteen results of business, the student will neither fail in 
 readily acquiring the science as it is, uor in becoming able intelligently to apply it in 
 the interpretation of business 
 
 Smith and Martin's Book-keeping. 
 Smith and Martin's Blanks. 
 
 This work is by a practical teacher and a practical book-keeper. It is of a thoroughly 
 popular class, and will be welcomed by every one. who loves to see theory and practice 
 combined in an easy, concise, and methodical form. 
 
 The single-entry portion is well adapted to supply a want felt in nearly all other 
 treatises, which seem to be prepared mainly for the use of wholesale merchants ; 
 leaving retailers, mechanics, farmers, &c. , who transact the greater portion of the 
 business of the country, without a guide. The work is also commended, on this 
 account, for general use in young ladies' seminaries, where a thorough grounding 
 in the simpler form of accounts will be invaluable to the future housekeepers of the 
 nation. 
 
 The treatise on double-entry book-keeping combines all the advantages of the 
 most recent methods with the utmost simplicity of application, thus affording the 
 pupil all the advantages of actual experience in the counting-house, and giving a 
 clear comprehension of the entire subject through a judicious course of mercantile 
 transactions. 
 
 PRACTICAL BOOK-KEEPING. 
 
 Stone's Post-Office Account Book. 
 
 By Micah H. Stone. For record of Box Rents and Postages. Three sizes always in 
 stock. 64, 108, and 204 pages. 
 
 INTEREST TABLES. 
 
 Brooks's Circular Interest Tables. 
 
 To calculate simple and compound interest for any amount, from 1 cent to 1,000, at 
 current rates from 1 day to 7 years. 
 
 31 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 DR. STEELE'S ONE-TERM SERIES, 
 IN ALL THE SCIENCES. 
 
 Steele's i4-Weeks Course in Chemistry. 
 Steele's 14- Weeks Course in Astronomy. 
 Steele's i4-Weeks Course in Physics. 
 Steele's i4-Weeks Course in Geology. 
 Steele's i4-Weeks Course in Physiology. 
 Steele's i4-Weeks Course in Zoology. 
 Steele's i4-Weeks Course in Botany. 
 
 Our text-books in these studies are, as a general thing, dull and uninteresting. 
 They contain from 400 to 600 pages of dry facts and unconnected details. They abound 
 in that which the student cannot learn, much less remember. Tlie pupil commences 
 the study, is confused by the line print arid coarse print, and neither knowing exactly 
 what to learn nor what to hasten over, is crowded through the single term generally 
 assigned to each branch, and frequently comes to the close without a definite and exact 
 idea of a single scientific principle. 
 
 Steele's " Fourteen- Weeks Courses " contain only that which every well-informed per- 
 son should know, while all that which concerns only the professional scientist is omitted. 
 The language is clear, simple, and interesting, and the illustrations bring the subject 
 within the range of home life and daily experience. They give such of the general 
 principles and the prominent facts as a pupil can make familiar as household words 
 within a single term. The type is large and open ; there is no fine print to annoy ; 
 the cuts are copies of genuine experiments or natural phenomena, and are of fine 
 execution. 
 
 In fine, by a system of condensation peculiarly his own, the author reduces each 
 branch to the limits of a single term of study, while sacrificing nothing that is essential, 
 and nothing that is usually retained from tire study of the larger manuals in common 
 use. Thus the student has rare opportunity to economize his time, or rather to employ 
 that which he has to the best advantage. 
 
 A notable feature is the author's charming " style," fortified by an enthusiasm over 
 his subject in which the student will not fail to partake. Believing that Natural 
 Science is full of fascination, he has moulded it into a form that attracts the attention 
 and kindles the enthusiasm of the pupil. 
 
 The recent editions contain the author's " Practical Questions " on a plan never 
 before attempted in scientific, text-books. These are questions as to the nature and 
 cause of common phenomena, and are not directly answered in the text, the design 
 being to test and promote an intelligent use of the student's knowledge of the foregoing 
 principles. 
 
 Steele's Key to all His Werks. 
 
 This work is mainly composed of answers to the Practical Questions, and solutions of the 
 problems, in the author's celebrated " Fourteen-Weeks Courses " in the several sciences, 
 with many hints to teachers, minor tables, &c. Should be on every teacher's desk. 
 
 Prof. J. Dorman Steele is an indefatigable student, as well as author, and his books 
 have reached a fabulous circulation. It is sate to say of his books that they have 
 accomplished more tangible and better results in the class-room than any other ever 
 offered to American schools, and have been translated into more languages for foreign 
 schools. They are even produced in raised type for the blind. 
 
 32 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 THE NEW GANOT. 
 
 Introductory Course of Natural Philosophy. 
 
 This book was originally edited from Ganot's " Popular Physics," by William G. 
 Peck, LL.D., Professor of Mathematics and Astronomy, Columbia College, and of 
 Mechanics in the School of Mines. It has recently been revised by Levi S. Bur- 
 bank, A. M., late Principal of Warren Academy, Woburn, Mass., arid James I. Hanson, 
 A.M., Principal of the High School, Woburn, Mass. 
 
 Of elementary works those of M. Ganot stand pre-eminent, not only as popular 
 treatises, but as thoroughly scientific expositions of the principles of Physics. His 
 " Traite de Physique " has not only met with unprecedented success in France, but has 
 been extensively used in the preparation of the best works on Physics that have been 
 Issued from the American press. 
 
 In addition to the "Traite de Physique," which is intended for the use of colleges 
 and higher institutions of learning, M. Ganot published this more elementary work, 
 adapted to the use of schools and academies, in which he faithfully preserved the 
 prominent features and all the scientific accuracy of the larger work. It is charcter- 
 ized by a well-balanced distribution of subjects, a logical development of scientific 
 principles, and a remarkable clearness of definition and explanation. In addition, it is 
 profusely illustrated with beautifully executed engravings, admirably calculated to 
 convey to the mind of the student a clear conception of the principles unfolded. Their 
 completeness and accuracy are such as to enable the teacher to dispense with much of 
 the apparatus usually employed in teaching the elements of Physical Science. 
 
 After several years of great popularity the American publishers have brought this 
 important book thoroughly up to the times. The death of the accomplished educator, 
 Professor Burbank, took place before he had completed his work, and it was then 
 taken in hand by his friend, Professor Hanson, who was familiar with his plans, and 
 lias ably and satisfactorily brought the work to completion. 
 
 The essential characteristics and general plan of the book have, so far as possible, 
 been retained, but at the same time many parts have been entirely rewritten, much 
 new matter added, a large number of new cuts introduced, and the whole treatise 
 thoroughly revised and brought into harmony with the present advanced stage of sci- 
 entific discovery. 
 
 Among the new features designed to aid in teaching the subject-matter are the 
 summaries of topics, which, it is thought, will be found very convenient in short 
 reviews. 
 
 As many teachers prefer to prepare their own questions on the text, and many do not 
 have time to spend in the solution of problems, it has been deemed expedient to insert 
 both the review questions and problems at the end of the volume, to be used or not at 
 the discretion of the instructor. 
 
 Fram the Churchman. 
 
 " No department of science has under- 
 gone so many improvements and changes 
 in the last quarter of a century as that of 
 natural philosophy. So many and so im- 
 portant have been the discoveries and 
 inventions in every branch of it that 
 everything seems changed but its funda- 
 mental principles. Ganot has chapter 
 upon chapter upon subjects that were not 
 so much as known by name to Olmsted ; 
 and here we have Ganot, first edited by 
 Professor Peck, and afterward revised by 
 the late Mr. Burbank and Mr. Hanson. No 
 elementary works upon philosophy have 
 been superior to those of Ganot, either as 
 popular treatises or as scientific exposi- 
 tions of the principles of physics, and 
 his ' Traite de Physique ' has not only had 
 a great success in France, but has been 
 freely used in this country in the prepa- 
 ration of American books upon the sub- 
 
 jects of- which it treats. That work was 
 intended for higher institutions of learn- 
 ing, and Mr. Ganot prepared a more 
 elementary work for schools and acade- 
 mies. It is as scientifically accurate as 
 the larger work, and is characterized by 
 a logical development of scientific princi- 
 ples, by clearness of definition and expla- 
 nation, by a proper distribution of sub- 
 jects, and by its admirable engravings. 
 We here have Ganot's work enhanced in 
 value by the labors of Professor Peck and of 
 Messrs. Burbank and Hanson, and brought 
 up to our own times. The essential char- 
 acteristics of Ganot's work have been re- 
 tained, but much of the book lias been 
 rewritten, and many new cuts have been 
 introduced, made necessary by the prog- 
 ress of scientific discovery. The short 
 reviews, the questions on the text, and 
 the problems given for solution are desir- 
 able additions to a work of this kind, and 
 will give the book increased popularity." 
 
 34 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 FAMILIAR SCIENCE. 
 
 Norton & Porter's First Book of Science. 
 
 Setsf>rth the principles of Natural Philosophy, Astronomy, Chemistry, Physic "o y. 
 anJ Geology, on the catechetical plan for primary classes an I beginners. 
 
 Chambers's Treasury of Knowledge. 
 
 Progressive lessons upon first, common things which lie most immediately around 
 us, and first attract the attention of the young mind ; second, common objects from ti.e 
 mineral, animal, and vegetable kingdoms, manufactured articles, and miscellaneous 
 substances ; third, a systematic view of nature under the various sciences. May be 
 used as a reader or text-book. 
 
 Monteith's Easy Lessons in Popular Science. 
 
 This book combines within its covers more attractive features for the study of science 
 by children than any other book published. It is a reading book, spelling book, com- 
 position book, drawing book, geography, history, book on botany, zoology, agricul- 
 ture, manufactures, commerce, and natural philosophy. All these subjects are presented 
 in a simple and effective style, such as would be adopted by a good teacher on an 
 excursion with a class. The class are supposed to be taking excursions, with the help 
 of a large pictorial chart of geography, which can be suspended before them in the 
 school-room. A key of the chart is inserted in every copy of the book. With this 
 book the science of common or familiar things can be taught to beginners. 
 
 NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 Norton's First Book in Natural Philosophy. 
 Peck's Elements of Mechanics. 
 
 A suitable introduction to Bartlett's higher treatises on Mechanical Philosophy, and 
 adequate in itself tor a complete academical course. 
 
 Bartlett's Analytical Mechanics. 
 Bartlett's Acoustics and Optics. 
 
 A complete system of Collegiate Philosophy, by Prof. W. H. C. Bartlett, of West 
 Point Military Academy. 
 
 Steele's Physics. 
 
 Peck's Ganot. 
 
 GEOLOGY. 
 
 Page's Elements of Geology. 
 
 A volume of Chambers's Educational Course. Practical, simple, an/ 1 "tninently 
 calculated to make the study interesting. 
 
 Steele's Geology. 
 
 CHEMISTRY. 
 
 Porter's First Book of Chemistry. 
 Porter's Principles of Chemistry. 
 
 The above are widely known as the productions of one of the most eminent scientific 
 men of America. The extreme simplicity in the method of presenting the science, while 
 exhaustively treated, lias excited universal commendation. 
 
 Gregory's Chemistry (Organic and Inorganic). 2 vols, 
 
 The science exhaustively treated. For colleges and medical students. 
 
 Steele's Chemistry. 
 
 36 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 NATURAL SCIENCE Continued. 
 
 BOTANY. 
 
 Wood's Object-Lessons in Botany. 
 Wood's American Botanist and Florist. 
 Wood's New Class-Book of Botany. 
 
 The standard text-hooks of the United States in this department. In style they are 
 simple, popular, and lively ; in arrangement, easy and natural ; in description, graphic 
 ;:nd scientific. The Tables for Analysis are reduced to a perfect system. They include 
 the flora ol the whole United States east of the Rocky Mountains, and are well adapted 
 to the regions west. 
 
 Wood's Descriptive Botany. 
 
 A complete flora of all plants growing east of the Mississippi River. 
 
 Wood's Illustrated Plant Record. 
 
 A simple form of blanks for recording observations in the field. 
 
 Wood's Botanical Apparatus. 
 
 A portable trunk, containing drying pre.',s, knife, trowel, microscope, and tweezers, 
 and a copy of Wood's " Plant Record," the collector's complete outlit. 
 
 Willis's Flora of New Jersey. 
 
 The most useful book of reference e<cr published for collectors in all parts of the 
 country. It contains also a Botanical Directory, with addresses of living American 
 botanists. 
 
 Young's Familiar Lessons in Botany. 
 
 Combining simplicity of diction with some degree of technical and scientific knowl- 
 edge, lor intermediate classes. Specially adapted for the Southwest. 
 
 Wood & Steele's Botany. 
 
 See page 33. 
 
 AGRICULTURE. 
 
 Pendleton's Scientific Agriculture. 
 
 A text-book for colleges and schools ; treats of the following topics : Anatomy and 
 Physiology of Plants ; Agricultural Meteorology ; Soils as related to Physics ; Chemistry 
 of the Atmosphere ; of Plants ; of Soils ; Fertilizers and Natural Manures; Animal Nu- 
 trition, &c. I3y E. M. Pendleton, M. D., Professor of Agriculture in the University of 
 Georgia. 
 
 From PRESIDENT A. D. WHITE, Cornell 
 
 University. 
 
 " Dear Sir : I have examined your 
 ' Text-book of Agricultural Science,' and it 
 seems to me excellent in view of the pur- 
 pose it is intended to serve. Many of 
 your chapters interested me especially, 
 and all parts of the work seem to combine 
 scientific instruction with practical infor- 
 mation in proportions dictated by sound 
 common sense." 
 
 From PRESIDENT ROBINSON, of Brown 
 
 University. 
 
 " It is scientific in method as well as in 
 matter, comprehensive in plan, natural 
 and logical in order, compart and lucid in 
 its statements, and must.be useful both as 
 a text-book in agricultural colleges, and 
 as a hand-book for intelligent planters and 
 farmers." 
 
 37 
 
THE NATIONAL SER/ES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 NATURAL SCIENCE Continued. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 Jarvis's Elements of Physiology. 
 Jarvis's Physiology and Laws of Health. 
 
 The only books extant \vhicn approach this subject with a proper view of the true 
 object of teaching Physiology iu schools, viz., that scholars may know how to take care 
 of their own health. In bold contrast with the abstract Anatomies, which children 
 learn as they would Greek or Latin (and forget as soon), to discipline the mind, are these 
 text-books, using the science as a secondary consideration, and only so far as is neces- 
 sary for the comprehension of the laws o, tiealtk. 
 
 Steele's Physiology. 
 
 See page 33. 
 
 ASTRONOMY. 
 
 Willard's School Astronomy. 
 
 J3y means of clear and attractive illustrations, addressing the eye in many cases by 
 analogies, careful definitions of all necessary technical terms, a careful avoidance of ver- 
 biage, and unimportant matter, particular attention to analysis, and a general .adoption 
 of the simplest methods, Mrs. Willard has made the best and most attractive elemen- 
 tary Astronomy extant. 
 
 Mclntyre's Astronomy and the Globes. 
 
 A complete treatise for intermediate classes. Highly approved. 
 
 Bartlett's Spherical Astronomy. 
 
 The West Point Course, for advanced classes, with applications to the current wants 
 of Navigation, Geography, and Chronology. 
 
 Steele's Astronomy. 
 
 See page 33. . 
 
 NATURAL HISTORY. 
 
 Carll's Child's Book of Natural History. 
 
 Illustrating the animal, vegetable, and mineial kingdoms, witli application to the 
 arts. For beginners. Beautifully ai,d copiously illustrated. 
 
 Anatomical Technology. Wilder & Gage. 
 
 As applied to the domestic cat. For the use of students of medicine. 
 
 ZOOLOGY. 
 
 Chambers's Elements of Zoology. 
 
 A complete and comprehensive system of Zoology, adapted for academic instruction, 
 presenting a systematic view of the animal kingdom as a portion of external nature. 
 
 Steele's Zoology. 
 
 See page 33. 
 
 38 
 
THE NATIONAL SERIES OF STANDARD SCHOOL-BOOKS. 
 
 LITERATURE. 
 
 Oilman's First Steps in English Literature. 
 
 The character and plan of this exquisite little text-book may be best understood irom 
 an analysis of its contents : Introduction. Historical Period of Immature English, 
 with Chart ; Definition of Terms ; Languages of Europe, with Chart ; Period of Mature 
 English, with Chart ; a Chart of Bible Translations, a Bibliography or Guide to General 
 Reading, and other aids to the student. 
 
 Cleveland's Compendiums. 3 vols. 12mo. 
 
 ENGLISH LITERATURE. AMERICAN LITERATURE. 
 
 ENGLISH LITERATURE OF THE XIXTii CENTURY. 
 
 In these volumes are gathered the cream of the literature, of the English-speaking 
 people for the school-room and the general reader. Their reputation is national. More 
 than 125,000 copies have been sold. 
 
 Boyd's English Classics. 6 vols. Cloth. 12mo. 
 MILTON'S PARADISE LOST. THOMSON'S SEASONS 
 
 YOUNG'S NIGHT THOUGHTS. FOLLOK'S COURSE OF TIME. 
 
 COWPER'S TASK, TABLE TALK, &c. LORD BACON'S ESSXYS. 
 
 This series of annotated editions of great English writers in prose and poetry is 
 designed for critical reading and parsing in schools. Prof. J. R. Boyd proves himself 
 an editor of high capacity, and the works themselves need no encomium. As auxiliary 
 to the study of belles-lettres, &e., these works have no equal. 
 
 Pope's Essay on Man. Ifimo. Paper. 
 Pope's Homer's Iliad. 32mo. Roan. 
 
 The metrical translation of the great poet of antiquity, and the matchless "Essay on 
 the Nature and State of Man," by Alexander Pope, afford superior exercise in literature 
 and parsing. 
 
 POLITICAL ECONOMY. 
 
 Champlin's Lessons on Political Economy. 
 
 An improvement on previous treatises, being shorter, yet containing evorythim> 
 essential, with a view of recent questions in finance, &c., which is not elsewhere 
 found. 
 
 39 
 
-2-7- 
 
 
 
 a. 
 
 --